Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
File info: application/pdf · 218 pages · 8.07MB
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Electromagnetic flowmeter
Operating, Instructions;, Promag, W, 300;, Electromagnetic, flowmeter
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP - My Endress Hauser ID
2020-01-01. Valid as of version ... Before starting work, read and understand the instructions in the manual and ... Follow the instructions in this manual. 2.2.
Copy Link
Proline Promag W 300 electromagnetic flowmeter | Endress Hauser
Full PDF Document
If the inline viewer fails, it will open the original document in compatibility mode automatically. You can also open the file directly.
Extracted Text
BA01937D/06/EN/02.20 71453941 2020-01-01 Valid as of version 01.00.zz (Device firmware)
Products
Solutions
Operating Instructions Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Electromagnetic flowmeter
Services
Keep cover tig
ht while
�ffnen
Spannung
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP � Make sure the document is stored in a safe place such that it is always available when
working on or with the device. � To avoid danger to individuals or the facility, read the "Basic safety instructions" section
carefully, as well as all other safety instructions in the document that are specific to working procedures. � The manufacturer reserves the right to modify technical data without prior notice. Your Endress+Hauser Sales Center will supply you with current information and updates to these instructions.
2
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Table of contents
Table of contents
1 About this document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.1 Document function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 1.2 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.2.1 Safety symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 1.2.2 Electrical symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 1.2.3 Communication symbols . . . . . . . . . . . 6 1.2.4 Tool symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 1.2.5 Symbols for
certain types of information . . . . . . . . . 7 1.2.6 Symbols in graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 1.3 Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 1.3.1 Standard documentation . . . . . . . . . . . 8 1.3.2 Supplementary device-dependent
documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 1.4 Registered trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.1 Requirements for the personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2.2 Designated use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2.3 Workplace safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 2.4 Operational safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 2.5 Product safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 2.6 IT security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 2.7 Device-specific IT security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.7.1 Protecting access via hardware write protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.7.2 Protecting access via a password . . . . 11 2.7.3 Access via Web server . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 2.7.4 Access via service interface (CDI-
RJ45) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3 Product description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
3.1 Product design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
4 Incoming acceptance and product identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
4.1 Incoming acceptance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 4.2 Product identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
4.2.1 Transmitter nameplate . . . . . . . . . . . 16 4.2.2 Sensor nameplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 4.2.3 Symbols on measuring device . . . . . . 18
5 Storage and transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
5.1 Storage conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 5.2 Transporting the product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
5.2.1 Measuring devices without lifting lugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
5.2.2 Measuring devices with lifting lugs . . 20 5.2.3 Transporting with a fork lift . . . . . . . . 20 5.3 Packaging disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Endress+Hauser
6 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
6.1 Installation conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 6.1.1 Mounting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 6.1.2 Environment and process requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 6.1.3 Special mounting instructions . . . . . . 26
6.2 Mounting the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . 26 6.2.1 Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 6.2.2 Preparing the measuring device . . . . . 26 6.2.3 Mounting the sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 6.2.4 Turning the transmitter housing . . . . 33 6.2.5 Turning the display module . . . . . . . . 34
6.3 Post-installation check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
7 Electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
7.1 Connection conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 7.1.1 Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 7.1.2 Requirements for connecting cable . . . 36 7.1.3 Terminal assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 7.1.4 Device plugs available . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 7.1.5 Pin assignment of device plug . . . . . . 39 7.1.6 Preparing the measuring device . . . . . 39
7.2 Connecting the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . 40 7.2.1 Connecting the transmitter . . . . . . . . 40 7.2.2 Integrating the transmitter into a network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 7.2.3 Connecting the remote display and operating module DKX001 . . . . . . . . 46
7.3 Ensuring potential equalization . . . . . . . . . . . 46 7.3.1 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 7.3.2 Connection example, standard scenario . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 7.3.3 Connection example in special situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
7.4 Special connection instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 7.4.1 Connection examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
7.5 Hardware settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 7.5.1 Setting the device address . . . . . . . . . 51 7.5.2 Activating the default IP address . . . . 52
7.6 Ensuring the degree of protection . . . . . . . . . . 53 7.7 Post-connection check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
8 Operation options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
8.1 Overview of operation options . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 8.2 Structure and function of the operating
menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 8.2.1 Structure of the operating menu . . . . 56 8.2.2 Operating philosophy . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 8.3 Access to the operating menu via the local display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 8.3.1 Operational display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 8.3.2 Navigation view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 8.3.3 Editing view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 8.3.4 Operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
3
Table of contents
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
8.3.5 Opening the context menu . . . . . . . . . 63 8.3.6 Navigating and selecting from list . . . 65 8.3.7 Calling the parameter directly . . . . . . 65 8.3.8 Calling up help text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 8.3.9 Changing the parameters . . . . . . . . . 66 8.3.10 User roles and related access
authorization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 8.3.11 Disabling write protection via access
code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 8.3.12 Enabling and disabling the keypad
lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 8.4 Access to the operating menu via the Web
browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 8.4.1 Function range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 8.4.2 Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 8.4.3 Establishing a connection . . . . . . . . . 70 8.4.4 Logging on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 8.4.5 User interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 8.4.6 Disabling the Web server . . . . . . . . . . 75 8.4.7 Logging out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 8.5 Access to the operating menu via the operating tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 8.5.1 Connecting the operating tool . . . . . . 76 8.5.2 FieldCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 8.5.3 DeviceCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
9 System integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
9.1 Overview of device description files . . . . . . . . . 82 9.1.1 Current version data for the device . . . 82 9.1.2 Operating tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
9.2 Overview of system files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 9.3 Integrating the measuring device in the
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 9.4 Cyclic data transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
9.4.1 Block model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 9.4.2 Input and output groups . . . . . . . . . . 84 9.5 Diagnostic information via EtherNet/IP . . . . . 90
10 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
10.1 Function check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 10.2 Switching on the measuring device . . . . . . . . . 93 10.3 Connecting via FieldCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 10.4 Setting the operating language . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 10.5 Configuring the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . 94
10.5.1 Defining the tag name . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 10.5.2 Setting the system units . . . . . . . . . . 95 10.5.3 Configuring the communication
interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 10.5.4 Displaying the I/O configuration . . . . 98 10.5.5 Configuring the current input . . . . . . 99 10.5.6 Configuring the status input . . . . . . 100 10.5.7 Configuring the current output . . . . 101 10.5.8 Configuring the pulse/frequency/
switch output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 10.5.9 Configuring the relay output . . . . . . 109 10.5.10 Configuring the local display . . . . . . 110 10.5.11 Configuring the low flow cut off . . . . 113 10.5.12 Configuring empty pipe detection . . 114
4
10.6 Advanced settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 10.6.1 Using the parameter to enter the access code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 10.6.2 Carrying out a sensor adjustment . . . 116 10.6.3 Configuring the totalizer . . . . . . . . . 116 10.6.4 Carrying out additional display configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 10.6.5 Performing electrode cleaning . . . . . 121 10.6.6 WLAN configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 10.6.7 Configuration management . . . . . . . 124 10.6.8 Using parameters for device administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
10.7 Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 10.8 Protecting settings from unauthorized
access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 10.8.1 Write protection via access code . . . 130 10.8.2 Write protection via write protection
switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
11 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
11.1 Reading the device locking status . . . . . . . . . 133 11.2 Adjusting the operating language . . . . . . . . . 133 11.3 Configuring the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 11.4 Reading measured values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
11.4.1 "Process variables" submenu . . . . . . . 134 11.4.2 "Totalizer" submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 11.4.3 "Input values" submenu . . . . . . . . . . 135 11.4.4 Output values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 11.5 Adapting the measuring device to the process conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 11.6 Performing a totalizer reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 11.6.1 Function scope of the "Control
Totalizer" parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 11.6.2 Function scope of the "Reset all
totalizers" parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 11.7 Showing data logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
12 Diagnostics and troubleshooting . . 143
12.1 General troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 12.2 Diagnostic information via light emitting
diodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 12.2.1 Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 12.3 Diagnostic information on local display . . . . . 147 12.3.1 Diagnostic message . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 12.3.2 Calling up remedial measures . . . . . 149 12.4 Diagnostic information in the Web browser . 149 12.4.1 Diagnostic options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 12.4.2 Calling up remedy information . . . . 150 12.5 Diagnostic information in FieldCare or DeviceCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 12.5.1 Diagnostic options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 12.5.2 Calling up remedy information . . . . 151 12.6 Diagnostic information via communication interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 12.6.1 Reading out diagnostic information 152 12.7 Adapting the diagnostic information . . . . . . 152 12.7.1 Adapting the diagnostic behavior . . . 152
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Table of contents
12.8 Overview of diagnostic information . . . . . . . 153 12.8.1 Diagnostic of sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 12.8.2 Diagnostic of electronic . . . . . . . . . . 154 12.8.3 Diagnostic of configuration . . . . . . . 158 12.8.4 Diagnostic of process . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
12.9 Pending diagnostic events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 12.10 Diagnostic list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 12.11 Event logbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
12.11.1 Reading out the event logbook . . . . . 166 12.11.2 Filtering the event logbook . . . . . . . 167 12.11.3 Overview of information events . . . . 167 12.12 Resetting the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . 168 12.12.1 Function scope of the "Device reset"
parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 12.13 Device information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 12.14 Firmware history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
13 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
13.1 Maintenance tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 13.1.1 Exterior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 13.1.2 Interior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 13.1.3 Replacing seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
13.2 Measuring and test equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 172 13.3 Endress+Hauser services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
14 Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
14.1 General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 14.1.1 Repair and conversion concept . . . . . 173 14.1.2 Notes for repair and conversion . . . . 173
14.2 Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 14.3 Endress+Hauser services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 14.4 Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 14.5 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
14.5.1 Removing the measuring device . . . . 173 14.5.2 Disposing of the measuring device . . 174
15 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
15.1 Device-specific accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 15.1.1 For the transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 15.1.2 For the sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
15.2 Communication-specific accessories . . . . . . . 176 15.3 Service-specific accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 15.4 System components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
16 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
16.1 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 16.2 Function and system design . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 16.3 Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 16.4 Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 16.5 Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 16.6 Performance characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 16.7 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 16.8 Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 16.9 Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 16.10 Mechanical construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 16.11 Human interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
16.12 Certificates and approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 16.13 Application packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 16.14 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 16.15 Supplementary documentation . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Endress+Hauser
5
About this document
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
1
About this document
1.1 Document function
These Operating Instructions contain all the information that is required in various phases of the life cycle of the device: from product identification, incoming acceptance and storage, to mounting, connection, operation and commissioning through to troubleshooting, maintenance and disposal.
1.2 Symbols
1.2.1 Safety symbols
DANGER
This symbol alerts you to a dangerous situation. Failure to avoid this situation will result in serious or fatal injury.
WARNING
This symbol alerts you to a dangerous situation. Failure to avoid this situation can result in serious or fatal injury.
CAUTION
This symbol alerts you to a dangerous situation. Failure to avoid this situation can result in minor or medium injury.
NOTICE
This symbol contains information on procedures and other facts which do not result in personal injury.
1.2.2 Electrical symbols
Symbol
Meaning
Direct current
Alternating current
Direct current and alternating current
Ground connection A grounded terminal which, as far as the operator is concerned, is grounded via a grounding system.
Protective Earth (PE) A terminal which must be connected to ground prior to establishing any other connections. The ground terminals are situated inside and outside the device: � Inner ground terminal: Connects the protectiv earth to the mains supply. � Outer ground terminal: Connects the device to the plant grounding system.
1.2.3 Communication symbols
Symbol
Meaning
Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) Communication via a wireless, local network.
LED Light emitting diode is off.
6
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
About this document
Symbol
Meaning
LED Light emitting diode is on.
LED Light emitting diode is flashing.
1.2.4 Tool symbols
Symbol
Meaning Flat blade screwdriver
Allen key
Open-ended wrench
1.2.5 Symbols for certain types of information
Symbol
Meaning
Permitted Procedures, processes or actions that are permitted.
Preferred Procedures, processes or actions that are preferred.
Forbidden Procedures, processes or actions that are forbidden.
Tip Indicates additional information.
Reference to documentation.
A
Reference to page.
Reference to graphic.
1. , 2. , 3. ...
Notice or individual step to be observed. Series of steps. Result of a step.
Help in the event of a problem.
Visual inspection.
1.2.6 Symbols in graphics
Symbol 1, 2, 3, ... 1. , 2. , 3. , ... A, B, C, ... A-A, B-B, C-C, ...
-
Meaning Item numbers Series of steps Views Sections Hazardous area
Endress+Hauser
7
About this document 8
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Symbol
.
Meaning Safe area (non-hazardous area)
Flow direction
1.3 Documentation
For an overview of the scope of the associated Technical Documentation, refer to the following: � W@M Device Viewer (www.endress.com/deviceviewer): Enter the serial number
from nameplate � Endress+Hauser Operations App: Enter the serial number from the nameplate or
scan the 2D matrix code (QR code) on the nameplate Detailed list of the individual documents along with the documentation code 210
1.3.1 Standard documentation
Document type
Purpose and content of the document
Technical Information
Planning aid for your device The document contains all the technical data on the device and provides an overview of the accessories and other products that can be ordered for the device.
Sensor Brief Operating Instructions
Guides you quickly to the 1st measured value - Part 1 The Sensor Brief Operating Instructions are aimed at specialists with responsibility for installing the measuring device.
� Incoming acceptance and product identification � Storage and transport � Installation
Transmitter Brief Operating Instructions
Guides you quickly to the 1st measured value - Part 2 The Transmitter Brief Operating Instructions are aimed at specialists with responsibility for commissioning, configuring and parameterizing the measuring device (until the first measured value).
� Product description � Installation � Electrical connection � Operation options � System integration � Commissioning � Diagnostic information
Description of Device Parameters
Reference for your parameters The document provides a detailed explanation of each individual parameter in the Expert operating menu. The description is aimed at those who work with the device over the entire life cycle and perform specific configurations.
1.3.2 Supplementary device-dependent documentation
Additional documents are supplied depending on the device version ordered: Always comply strictly with the instructions in the supplementary documentation. The supplementary documentation is an integral part of the device documentation.
1.4 Registered trademarks
EtherNet/IPTM Trademark of ODVA, Inc.
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Safety instructions
2
Safety instructions
2.1 Requirements for the personnel
The personnel for installation, commissioning, diagnostics and maintenance must fulfill the following requirements:
Trained, qualified specialists must have a relevant qualification for this specific function
and task.
Are authorized by the plant owner/operator. Are familiar with federal/national regulations. Before starting work, read and understand the instructions in the manual and
supplementary documentation as well as the certificates (depending on the application).
Follow instructions and comply with basic conditions.
The operating personnel must fulfill the following requirements:
Are instructed and authorized according to the requirements of the task by the facility's
owner-operator.
Follow the instructions in this manual.
2.2 Designated use
Application and media The measuring device described in these Brief Operating Instructions is intended only for flow measurement of liquids with a minimum conductivity of 5 �S/cm.
Depending on the version ordered, the measuring device can also measure potentially explosive, flammable, poisonous and oxidizing media. Measuring devices for use in hazardous areas, in hygienic applications or where there is an increased risk due to process pressure, are labeled accordingly on the nameplate. To ensure that the measuring device remains in proper condition for the operation time:
Keep within the specified pressure and temperature range. Only use the measuring device in full compliance with the data on the nameplate and
the general conditions listed in the Operating Instructions and supplementary documentation.
Based on the nameplate, check whether the ordered device is permitted for the
intended use in the hazardous area (e.g. explosion protection, pressure vessel safety).
Use the measuring device only for media to which the process-wetted materials are
sufficiently resistant.
If the ambient temperature of the measuring device is outside the atmospheric
temperature, it is absolutely essential to comply with the relevant basic conditions as specified in the device documentation. 8
Protect the measuring device permanently against corrosion from environmental
influences.
Incorrect use Non-designated use can compromise safety. The manufacturer is not liable for damage caused by improper or non-designated use.
LWARNING Danger of breakage due to corrosive or abrasive fluids and ambient conditions! Verify the compatibility of the process fluid with the sensor material. Ensure the resistance of all fluid-wetted materials in the process. Keep within the specified pressure and temperature range.
Endress+Hauser
9
Safety instructions
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
NOTICE Verification for borderline cases:
For special fluids and fluids for cleaning, Endress+Hauser is glad to provide assistance
in verifying the corrosion resistance of fluid-wetted materials, but does not accept any warranty or liability as minute changes in the temperature, concentration or level of contamination in the process can alter the corrosion resistance properties. Residual risks LWARNING The electronics and the medium may cause the surfaces to heat up. This presents a burn hazard!
For elevated fluid temperatures, ensure protection against contact to prevent burns.
2.3 Workplace safety
For work on and with the device:
Wear the required personal protective equipment according to federal/national
regulations. For welding work on the piping:
Do not ground the welding unit via the measuring device.
If working on and with the device with wet hands:
Due to the increased risk of electric shock, gloves must be worn.
2.4 Operational safety
Risk of injury.
Operate the device in proper technical condition and fail-safe condition only. The operator is responsible for interference-free operation of the device.
Conversions to the device Unauthorized modifications to the device are not permitted and can lead to unforeseeable dangers.
If, despite this, modifications are required, consult with Endress+Hauser.
Repair To ensure continued operational safety and reliability,
Carry out repairs on the device only if they are expressly permitted. Observe federal/national regulations pertaining to repair of an electrical device. Use original spare parts and accessories from Endress+Hauser only.
2.5 Product safety
This measuring device is designed in accordance with good engineering practice to meet state-of-the-art safety requirements, has been tested, and left the factory in a condition in which it is safe to operate. It meets general safety standards and legal requirements. It also complies with the EU directives listed in the device-specific EU Declaration of Conformity. Endress+Hauser confirms this by affixing the CE mark to the device.
10
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Safety instructions
2.6 IT security
Our warranty is valid only if the device is installed and used as described in the Operating Instructions. The device is equipped with security mechanisms to protect it against any inadvertent changes to the settings. IT security measures, which provide additional protection for the device and associated data transfer, must be implemented by the operators themselves in line with their security standards.
2.7 Device-specific IT security
The device offers a range of specific functions to support protective measures on the operator's side. These functions can be configured by the user and guarantee greater inoperation safety if used correctly. An overview of the most important functions is provided in the following section.
Function/interface Write protection via hardware write protection switch 11 Access code (also applies for Web server login or FieldCare connection) 12 WLAN (order option in display module) WLAN security mode
WLAN passphrase (password) 12 WLAN mode
Web server 12
CDI-RJ45 service interface 13
Factory setting Not enabled.
Not enabled (0000).
Recommendation
On an individual basis following risk assessment.
Assign a customized access code during commissioning.
Enabled.
Enabled (WPA2PSK) Serial number
Access Point
Enabled.
�
On an individual basis following risk assessment.
Do not change.
Assign an individual WLAN passphrase during commissioning.
On an individual basis following risk assessment.
On an individual basis following risk assessment.
On an individual basis following risk assessment.
2.7.1 Protecting access via hardware write protection
Write access to the device parameters via the local display, Web browser or operating tool (e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare) can be disabled via a write protection switch (DIP switch on the motherboard). When hardware write protection is enabled, only read access to the parameters is possible. Hardware write protection is disabled when the device is delivered 131.
2.7.2 Protecting access via a password
Different passwords are available to protect write access to the device parameters or access to the device via the WLAN interface.
Endress+Hauser
11
Safety instructions 12
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
� User-specific access code Protect write access to the device parameters via the local display, Web browser or operating tool (e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare). Access authorization is clearly regulated through the use of a user-specific access code.
� WLAN passphrase The network key protects a connection between an operating unit (e.g. notebook or tablet) and the device via the WLAN interface which can be ordered as an option.
� Infrastructure mode When the device is operated in infrastructure mode, the WLAN passphrase corresponds to the WLAN passphrase configured on the operator side.
User-specific access code Write access to the device parameters via the local display, Web browser or operating tool (e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare) can be protected by the modifiable, user-specific access code ( 130). When the device is delivered, the device does not have an access code and is equivalent to 0000 (open).
WLAN passphrase: Operation as WLAN access point A connection between an operating unit (e.g. notebook or tablet) and the device via the WLAN interface ( 78), which can be ordered as an optional extra, is protected by the network key. The WLAN authentication of the network key complies with the IEEE 802.11 standard. When the device is delivered, the network key is pre-defined depending on the device. It can be changed via the WLAN settings submenu in the WLAN passphrase parameter ( 124).
Infrastructure mode A connection between the device and WLAN access point is protected by means of an SSID and passphrase on the system side. Please contact the relevant system administrator for access.
General notes on the use of passwords � The access code and network key supplied with the device should be changed during
commissioning. � Follow the general rules for generating a secure password when defining and managing
the access code or network key. � The user is responsible for the management and careful handling of the access code and
network key. � For information on configuring the access code or on what to do if you lose the
password, see the "Write protection via access code" section 130
2.7.3 Access via Web server
The device can be operated and configured via a Web browser with the integrated Web server ( 68). The connection is via the service interface (CDI-RJ45), the connection for EtherNet/IP signal transmission (RJ45 connector) or the WLAN interface. The Web server is enabled when the device is delivered. The Web server can be disabled if necessary (e.g. after commissioning) via the Web server functionality parameter. The device and status information can be hidden on the login page. This prevents unauthorized access to the information.
For detailed information on device parameters, see: The "Description of Device Parameters" document 211.
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Safety instructions
2.7.4 Access via service interface (CDI-RJ45)
The device can be connected to a network via the service interface (CDI-RJ45). Devicespecific functions guarantee the secure operation of the device in a network. The use of relevant industrial standards and guidelines that have been defined by national and international safety committees, such as IEC/ISA62443 or the IEEE, is recommended. This includes organizational security measures such as the assignment of access authorization as well as technical measures such as network segmentation.
Transmitters with an Ex de approval may not be connected via the service interface (CDI-RJ45)! Order code for "Approval transmitter + sensor", options (Ex de): BA, BB, C1, C2, GA, GB, MA, MB, NA, NB The device can be integrated in a ring topology. The device is integrated via the terminal connection for signal transmission (output 1) and the connection to the service interface (CDI-RJ45) 45.
Endress+Hauser
13
Product description
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
3
Product description
The device consists of a transmitter and a sensor. The device is available as a compact version: The transmitter and sensor form a mechanical unit.
3.1 Product design
1
2
3
4
�ffnen
unter
Nicht
ay
ESC �
+ E
NSNsDeonpieocueahpnrsngtaontsiutezunoneoPntpdsugeoievrow�nrniferfwnrheenn I/O
Displ
e
ar
5
1 Important components of a measuring device 1 Connection compartment cover 2 Display module 3 Transmitter housing 4 Electronics compartment cover 5 Sensor
A0029586
14
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Incoming acceptance and product identification
4
Incoming acceptance and product
identification
4.1 Incoming acceptance
1
1
2
2
Are the order codes on the delivery note (1) and the product sticker (2) identical?
Are the goods undamaged?
Endress+Hauser
Order code: Ser. no.: Ext. ord. cd.:
i
i
Date:
Do the nameplate data match the ordering information on the delivery note?
Is the document folder present with accompanying documents? Is the optional CD-ROM with the Technical Documentation present?
� If one of the conditions is not satisfied, contact your Endress+Hauser Sales Center. � Depending on the device version, the CD-ROM might not be part of the delivery!
The Technical Documentation is available via the Internet or via the Endress+Hauser Operations App, see the "Product identification" section 16.
4.2 Product identification
The following options are available for identification of the device: � Nameplate specifications � Order code with breakdown of the device features on the delivery note � Enter serial numbers from nameplates in the W@M Device Viewer
(www.endress.com/deviceviewer): All information about the device is displayed. � Enter the serial number from nameplates in the Endress+Hauser Operations App or scan
the 2-D matrix code (QR code) on the nameplate using the Endress+Hauser Operations App: All information about the device is displayed.
15
Incoming acceptance and product identification
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
For an overview of the scope of the associated Technical Documentation, refer to the following: � The "Additional standard documentation on the device" 8 and "Supplementary
device-dependent documentation" 8 sections � The W@M Device Viewer: enter the serial number from the nameplate
(www.endress.com/deviceviewer) � The Endress+Hauser Operations App: Enter the serial number from the nameplate or
scan the 2-D matrix code (QR code) on the nameplate.
4.2.1 Transmitter nameplate
12
345
Order code: Ser. no.: Ext. ord. cd.:
20
19
18 17 16 15
14
i
i
6 7
8
Date:
9
13
12
11
10
2 Example of a transmitter nameplate
A0029192
1 Manufacturing location 2 Name of the transmitter 3 Order code 4 Serial number (ser. no.) 5 Extended order code (Ext. ord. cd.) 6 Degree of protection 7 Space for approvals: use in hazardous areas 8 Electrical connection data: available inputs and outputs 9 2-D matrix code 10 Manufacturing date: year-month 11 Document number of safety-related supplementary documentation 12 Space for approvals and certificates: e.g. CE mark, C-Tick 13 Space for degree of protection of connection and electronics compartment when used in hazardous areas 14 Firmware version (FW) and device revision (Dev.Rev.) from the factory 15 Space for additional information in the case of special products 16 Permitted temperature range for cable 17 Permitted ambient temperature (Ta)
18 Information on cable gland 19 Available inputs and outputs, supply voltage 20 Electrical connection data: supply voltage
16
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
4.2.2 Sensor nameplate
1
Incoming acceptance and product identification
2
Order code:
3
Ser. no.:
4
Ext. ord. cd.:
5
6
7
13
i
i
8
9
Date:
12
11
10
3 Example of sensor nameplate
A0029205
1 Name of the sensor 2 Place of manufacture 3 Order code 4 Serial number (ser. no.) 5 Extended order code (Ext. ord. cd.) 6 Flow; nominal diameter of the sensor; pressure rating; nominal pressure; system pressure; fluid temperature
range; material of liner and electrodes 7 Approval information for explosion protection, Pressure Equipment Directive and degree of protection 8 Document number of safety-related supplementary documentation 9 2-D matrix code 10 Manufacturing date: year-month 11 Flow direction 12 CE mark, C-Tick 13 Permitted ambient temperature (Ta)
Order code The measuring device is reordered using the order code. Extended order code � The device type (product root) and basic specifications (mandatory features) are
always listed. � Of the optional specifications (optional features), only the safety and approval-
related specifications are listed (e.g. LA). If other optional specifications are also ordered, these are indicated collectively using the # placeholder symbol (e.g. #LA#). � If the ordered optional specifications do not include any safety and approval-related specifications, they are indicated by the + placeholder symbol (e.g. XXXXXX-ABCDE +).
Endress+Hauser
17
Incoming acceptance and product identification
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
4.2.3 Symbols on measuring device
Symbol
Meaning
WARNING! This symbol alerts you to a dangerous situation. Failure to avoid this situation can result in serious or fatal injury.
Reference to documentation Refers to the corresponding device documentation.
Protective ground connection A terminal which must be connected to ground prior to establishing any other connections.
18
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Storage and transport
5
Storage and transport
5.1 Storage conditions
Observe the following notes for storage:
Store in the original packaging to ensure protection from shock. Do not remove protective covers or protective caps installed on process connections.
They prevent mechanical damage to the sealing surfaces and contamination in the measuring tube.
Protect from direct sunlight to avoid unacceptably high surface temperatures. Select a storage location where moisture cannot collect in the measuring device as
fungus and bacteria infestation can damage the lining.
Store in a dry and dust-free place. Do not store outdoors.
Storage temperature 192
5.2 Transporting the product
Transport the measuring device to the measuring point in the original packaging.
A0029252
Do not remove protective covers or caps installed on process connections. They prevent mechanical damage to the sealing surfaces and contamination in the measuring tube.
5.2.1 Measuring devices without lifting lugs LWARNING
Center of gravity of the measuring device is higher than the suspension points of the webbing slings. Risk of injury if the measuring device slips.
Secure the measuring device against slipping or turning. Observe the weight specified on the packaging (stick-on label).
Endress+Hauser
A0029214
19
Storage and transport
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
5.2.2 Measuring devices with lifting lugs LCAUTION
Special transportation instructions for devices with lifting lugs
Only use the lifting lugs fitted on the device or flanges to transport the device. The device must always be secured at two lifting lugs at least.
5.2.3 Transporting with a fork lift
If transporting in wood crates, the floor structure enables the crates to be lifted lengthwise or at both sides using a forklift. LCAUTION Risk of damaging the magnetic coil
If transporting by forklift, do not lift the sensor by the metal casing. This would buckle the casing and damage the internal magnetic coils.
A0029319
5.3 Packaging disposal
All packaging materials are environmentally friendly and 100% recyclable: � Outer packaging of device
Polymer stretch wrap that complies with EU Directive 2002/95/EC (RoHS) � Packaging
� Wooden crate treated in accordance with ISPM 15 standard, confirmed by IPPC logo � Cardboard box in accordance with European packaging guideline 94/62EC,
recyclability confirmed by Resy symbol � Carrying and securing materials
� Disposable plastic pallet � Plastic straps � Plastic adhesive strips � Filler material Paper pads
20
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
6
Installation
6.1 Installation conditions
6.1.1 Mounting position
Mounting location
Installation
h h
A0029343
Preferably install the sensor in an ascending pipe, and ensure a sufficient distance to the next pipe elbow: h 2 � DN.
Distance h 2 � DN not necessary with order code for "Design", option C, H, I.
1
1
4 Installation of the sensor after a control valve is not recommended 1 Control valve
A0033017
Installation in down pipes Install a siphon with a vent valve downstream of the sensor in down pipes whose length h 5 m (16.4 ft). This precaution is to avoid low pressure and the consequent risk of damage to the measuring tube. This measure also prevents the system losing prime.
1 2
Endress+Hauser
5 Installation in a down pipe
1 Vent valve 2 Pipe siphon h Length of down pipe
A0028981
21
Installation
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Installation in partially filled pipes A partially filled pipe with a gradient necessitates a drain-type configuration.
No inlet runs necessary with order code for "Design", option C, H, I
� 5 x DN
� 2 x DN
For heavy sensors DN 350 (14")
A0029257
A0016276
Orientation The direction of the arrow on the sensor nameplate helps you to install the sensor according to the flow direction (direction of medium flow through the piping).
A Vertical orientation
Orientation
Recommendation
B Horizontal orientation, transmitter at top
A0015591
1)
C Horizontal orientation, transmitter at bottom
A0015589
2) 3) 4)
D Horizontal orientation, transmitter at side
A0015590 A0015592
1) Applications with low process temperatures may decrease the ambient temperature. To maintain the minimum ambient temperature for the transmitter, this orientation is recommended.
2) Applications with high process temperatures may increase the ambient temperature. To maintain the maximum ambient temperature for the transmitter, this orientation is recommended.
3) To prevent the electronics module from overheating in the case of a sharp rise in temperature (e.g. CIP or SIP processes), install the device with the transmitter component pointing downwards.
4) With the empty pipe detection function switched on: empty pipe detection only works if the transmitter housing is pointing upwards.
22
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Installation
Horizontal � Ideally, the measuring electrode plane should be horizontal. This prevents brief
insulation of the measuring electrodes by entrained air bubbles. � Empty pipe detection only works if the transmitter housing is pointing upwards as
otherwise there is no guarantee that the empty pipe detection function will actually respond to a partially filled or empty measuring tube.
1
2
2
3
1 EPD electrode for empty pipe detection 2 Measuring electrodes for signal detection 3 Reference electrode for potential equalization
A0029344
Inlet and outlet runs If possible, install the sensor upstream from fittings such as valves, T-pieces or elbows. Observe the following inlet and outlet runs to comply with accuracy specifications:
5 � DN 2 � DN
Endress+Hauser
A0028997
For sensors with the order code for "Design", option C , H, I , no inlet or outlet runs need to be taken into account.
Installation dimensions For the dimensions and installation lengths of the device, see the "Technical Information" document, "Mechanical construction" section.
6.1.2 Environment and process requirements
Ambient temperature range
Transmitter Local display Sensor
Liner
Standard: �40 to +60 �C (�40 to +140 �F)
�20 to +60 �C (�4 to +140 �F), the readability of the display may be impaired at temperatures outside the temperature range.
� Process connection material, carbon steel: �10 to +60 �C (+14 to +140 �F)
� Process connection material, stainless steel: �40 to +60 �C (�40 to +140 �F)
Do not exceed or fall below the permitted temperature range of the liner .
23
Installation
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
If operating outdoors: � Install the measuring device in a shady location. � Avoid direct sunlight, particularly in warm climatic regions. � Avoid direct exposure to weather conditions. System pressure
A0028777
Never install the sensor on the pump suction side in order to avoid the risk of low pressure, and thus damage to the liner.
Furthermore, install pulse dampers if reciprocating, diaphragm or peristaltic pumps are used. � Information on the liner's resistance to partial vacuum 193 � Information on the shock resistance of the measuring system � Information on the vibration resistance of the measuring system
Vibrations
6 Measures to prevent vibration of the device
L > 10 m (33 ft)
A0029004
In the event of very strong vibrations, the pipe and sensor must be supported and fixed. It is also advisable to mount the sensor and transmitter separately.
� Information on the shock resistance of the measuring system � Information on the vibration resistance of the measuring system
Thermal insulation If process fluids are very hot, it is necessary to insulate pipes in order to reduce energy loss and to prevent individuals from accidentally coming into contact with hot pipes. Please observe the applicable standards and guidelines for insulating pipes.
LWARNING Electronics overheating on account of thermal insulation! The housing support is used for heat dissipation and must be completely free (i.e.
uncovered). At the very maximum, the sensor insulation may extend as far as the upper edge of the two sensor half-shells.
24
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Installation
max.
A0031216
Adapters Suitable adapters to DIN EN 545 (double-flange reducers) can be used to install the sensor in larger-diameter pipes. The resultant increase in the rate of flow improves measuring accuracy with very slow-moving fluids. The nomogram shown here can be used to calculate the pressure loss caused by reducers and expanders.
The nomogram only applies to liquids with a viscosity similar to that of water.
1. Calculate the ratio of the diameters d/D. 2. From the nomogram read off the pressure loss as a function of flow velocity
(downstream from the reduction) and the d/D ratio.
max. 8�
dD
8 m/s 7 m/s 6 m/s 5 m/s 4 m/s 3 m/s
2 m/s
1 m/s
100 [mbar] 10 1
0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9
d / D
A0029002
Endress+Hauser
25
Installation
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
6.1.3 Special mounting instructions
Protective cover
280 (11.0) 146 (5.75) 134 (5.3)
255 (10.0)
12 (0.47)
30 (1.18)
48 (1.9)
A0029553
6.2 Mounting the measuring device
6.2.1 Required tools
For sensor For flanges and other process connections: Corresponding mounting tools
6.2.2 Preparing the measuring device
1. Remove all remaining transport packaging. 2. Remove any protective covers or protective caps present from the sensor. 3. Remove stick-on label on the electronics compartment cover.
6.2.3 Mounting the sensor LWARNING
Danger due to improper process sealing!
Ensure that the inside diameters of the gaskets are greater than or equal to that of the
process connections and piping.
Ensure that the gaskets are clean and undamaged. Install the gaskets correctly.
1. Ensure that the direction of the arrow on the sensor matches the flow direction of the medium.
2. To ensure compliance with device specifications, install the measuring device between the pipe flanges in a way that it is centered in the measurement section.
3. If using ground disks, comply with the Installation Instructions provided. 4. Observe required screw tightening torques 27.
26
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Installation
5. Install the measuring device or turn the transmitter housing so that the cable entries do not point upwards.
Endress+Hauser
A0029263
Mounting the seals LCAUTION An electrically conductive layer could form on the inside of the measuring tube! Risk of measuring signal short circuit.
Do not use electrically conductive sealing compounds such as graphite.
Comply with the following instructions when installing seals: 1. Make sure that the seals do not protrude into the piping cross-section. 2. For DIN flanges: only use seals according to DIN EN 1514-1. 3. For "hard rubber" liner: additional seals are always required. 4. For "polyurethane" liner: generally additional seals are not required.
Mounting the ground cable/ground disks Comply with the information on potential equalization and detailed mounting instructions for the use of ground cables/ground disks 46.
Screw tightening torques Please note the following: � The screw tightening torques listed below apply only to lubricated threads and to pipes
not subjected to tensile stress. � Tighten the screws uniformly and in diagonally opposite sequence. � Overtightening the screws will deform the sealing faces or damage the seals.
Nominal screw tightening torques 32
Maximum screw tightening torques
Maximum screw tightening torques for EN 1092-1 (DIN 2501)
Nominal diameter
[mm]
[in]
25
1
32
�
40
1 �
50
2
65 1)
�
65
�
80
3
Pressure rating [bar] PN 40 PN 40 PN 40 PN 40 PN 16 PN 40 PN 16 PN 40
Screws
[mm] 4 � M12 4 � M16 4 � M16 4 � M16 8 � M16 8 � M16 8 � M16 8 � M16
Flange thickness
[mm] 18 18 18 20 18 22 20 24
Max. screw tightening torque [Nm]
HG
PUR
PTFE
�
15
26
�
24
41
�
31
52
48
40
65
32
27
44
32
27
44
40
34
53
40
34
53
27
Installation 28
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Nominal diameter
[mm]
[in]
100
4
125
�
150
6
200
8
250
10
300
12
350
14
400
16
450
18
500
20
600
24
600
24
600
24
700
28
800
32
Pressure rating [bar] PN 16 PN 40 PN 16 PN 40 PN 16 PN 40 PN 10 PN 16 PN 25 PN 10 PN 16 PN 25 PN 10 PN 16 PN 25 PN 6 PN 10 PN 16 PN 25 PN 6 PN 10 PN 16 PN 25 PN 6 PN 10 PN 16 PN 25 PN 6 PN 10 PN 16 PN 25 PN 6 PN 10 PN 16 PN 25 PN 6 PN 10 PN 16 PN 25 PN 6 PN 10
Screws
[mm] 8 � M16 8 � M20 8 � M16 8 � M24 8 � M20 8 � M24 8 � M20 12 � M20 12 � M24 12 � M20 12 � M24 12 � M27 12 � M20 12 � M24 16 � M27 12 � M20 16 � M20 16 � M24 16 � M30 16 � M20 16 � M24 16 � M27 16 � M33 16 � M20 20 � M24 20 � M27 20 � M33 20 � M20 20 � M24 20 � M30 20 � M33 20 � M24 20 � M27 20 � M33 20 � M36 24 � M24 24 � M27 24 � M33 24 � M39 24 � M27 24 � M30
Flange thickness
[mm] 20 24 22 26 22 28 24 24 30 26 26 32 26 28 34 22 26 30 38 22 26 32 40 22 28 40 46 24 28 34 48 30 28 36 58 24 30 36 46 24 32
Max. screw tightening torque [Nm]
HG
PUR
43
36
59
50
56
48
83
71
74
63
104
88
106
91
70
61
104
92
82
71
98
85
150
134
94
81
134
118
153
138
111
120
112
118
152
165
227
252
90
98
151
167
193
215
289
326
112
126
153
133
198
196
256
253
119
123
155
171
275
300
317
360
139
147
206
219
415
443
431
516
148
139
246
246
278
318
449
507
206
182
331
316
PTFE 57 79 75 112 99 137 141 94 139 110 132 201 126 179 204 � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � �
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Installation
Endress+Hauser
Nominal diameter
[mm]
[in]
900
36
1000
40
1200
48
1400
�
1600
�
1800
72
2000
�
2200
�
2400
�
Pressure rating [bar] PN 16 PN 25 PN 6 PN 10 PN 16 PN 25 PN 6 PN 10 PN 16 PN 25 PN 6 PN 10 PN 16 PN 6 PN 10 PN 16 PN 6 PN 10 PN 16 PN 6 PN 10 PN 16 PN 6 PN 10 PN 16 PN 6 PN 10 PN 6 PN 10
Screws
[mm] 24 � M36 24 � M45 24 � M27 28 � M30 28 � M36 28 � M45 28 � M27 28 � M33 28 � M39 28 � M52 32 � M30 32 � M36 32 � M45 36 � M33 36 � M39 36 � M45 40 � M33 40 � M45 40 � M52 44 � M36 44 � M45 44 � M52 48 � M39 48 � M45 48 � M56 52 � M39 52 � M52 56 � M39 56 � M52
Flange thickness
[mm] 38 50 26 34 40 54 26 34 42 58 28 38 48 32 42 52 34 46 58 36 50 62 38 54 66 42 58 44 62
1) Sizing as per EN 1092-1 (not DIN 2501)
Max. screw tightening torque [Nm]
HG
PUR
369
385
664
721
230
637
316
307
353
398
690
716
218
208
402
405
502
518
970
971
319
299
564
568
701
753
430
�
654
�
729
�
440
�
946
�
1007
�
547
�
961
�
1108
�
629
�
1047
�
1324
�
698
�
1217
�
768
�
1229
�
PTFE � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � �
Maximum screw tightening torques for ASME B16.5
Nominal diameter
[mm] [in]
25
1
25
1
40 1 �
40 1 �
50
2
Pressure rating
[psi]
Class 150 Class 300 Class 150 Class 300 Class 150
Screws
[in]
4 � � 4 � 5/8 4 � � 4 � � 4 � 5/8
Max. screw tightening torque
[Nm] � � � � 35
HG [lbf � ft] � � � � 26
PUR
[Nm]
[lbf � ft]
7
5
8
6
10
7
15
11
22
16
29
Installation 30
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Nominal diameter
[mm] [in]
50
2
80
3
80
3
100 4
100 4
150 6
150 6
200 8
250 10
300 12
350 14
400 16
450 18
500 20
600 24
Pressure rating
[psi]
Class 300 Class 150 Class 300 Class 150 Class 300 Class 150 Class 300 Class 150 Class 150 Class 150 Class 150 Class 150 Class 150 Class 150 Class 150
Screws
[in]
8 � 5/8 4 � 5/8 8 � � 8 � 5/8 8 � � 8 � � 12 � � 8 � � 12 � 7/8 12 � 7/8 12 � 1 16 � 1 16 � 1 1/8 20 � 1 1/8 20 � 1 �
Max. screw tightening torque
[Nm] 18 60 38 42 58 79 70 107 101 133 135 128 204 183 268
HG [lbf � ft] 13 44 28 31 43 58 52 79 74 98 100 94 150 135 198
[Nm] 11 43 26 31 40 59 51 80 75 103 158 150 234 217 307
PUR [lbf � ft] 8 32 19 23 30 44 38 59 55 76 117 111 173 160 226
Maximum screw tightening torques for JIS B2220
Nominal diameter [mm] 25 25 32 32 40 40 50 50 65 65 80 80 100 100 125 125 150 150 200 200 250
Pressure rating [bar] 10K 20K 10K 20K 10K 20K 10K 20K 10K 20K 10K 20K 10K 20K 10K 20K 10K 20K 10K 20K 10K
Screws [mm] 4 � M16 4 � M16 4 � M16 4 � M16 4 � M16 4 � M16 4 � M16 8 � M16 4 � M16 8 � M16 8 � M16 8 � M20 8 � M16 8 � M20 8 � M20 8 � M22 8 � M20 12 � M22 12 � M20 12 � M22 12 � M22
Max. screw tightening torque [Nm]
HG
PUR
�
19
�
19
�
22
�
22
�
24
�
24
40
33
20
17
55
45
28
23
29
23
42
35
35
29
56
48
60
51
91
79
75
63
81
72
61
52
91
80
100
87
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Installation
Nominal diameter [mm] 250 300 300
Pressure rating [bar] 20K 10K 20K
Screws [mm] 12 � M24 16 � M22 16 � M24
Max. screw tightening torque [Nm]
HG
PUR
159
144
74
63
138
124
Maximum screw tightening torques for AWWA C207, Class D
Nominal diameter
[mm] [in]
Screws [in]
700
28
750
30
800
32
900
36
1000 40
�
42
�
48
�
54
�
60
�
66
�
72
�
78
�
84
�
90
28 � 1 � 28 � 1 � 28 � 1 � 32 � 1 � 36 � 1 � 36 � 1 � 44 � 1 � 44 � 1 � 52 � 1 � 52 � 1 � 60 � 1 �
64 � 2 64 x 2 64 x 2 �
Max. screw tightening torque
[Nm] 247 287 394 419 420 528 552 730 758 946 975 853 931 1048
HG [lbf � ft] 182 212 291 309 310 389 407 538 559 698 719 629 687 773
[Nm] 292 302 422 430 477 518 531
� � � � � � �
PUR [lbf � ft] 215 223 311 317 352 382 392 � � � � � � �
Maximum screw tightening torques for AS 2129, Table E
Nominal diameter [mm] 50 80 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 750
Screws [mm] 4 � M16 4 � M16 8 � M16 8 � M20 8 � M20 12 � M20 12 � M24 12 � M24 12 � M24 16 � M24 16 � M24 16 � M30 20 � M30 20 � M30
Max. screw tightening torque [Nm]
HG
PUR
32
�
49
�
38
�
64
�
96
�
98
�
123
�
203
�
226
�
226
�
271
�
439
�
355
�
559
�
Endress+Hauser
31
Installation 32
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Nominal diameter [mm] 800 900 1000 1200
Screws [mm] 20 � M30 24 � M30 24 � M30 32 � M30
Max. screw tightening torque [Nm]
HG
PUR
631
�
627
�
634
�
727
�
Maximum screw tightening torques for AS 4087, PN 16
Nominal diameter [mm] 50 80 100 150 200 250 300 350 375 400 450 500 600 700 750 800 900 1000 1200
Screws [mm] 4 � M16 4 � M16 4 � M16 8 � M20 8 � M20 8 � M20 12 � M24 12 � M24 12 � M24 12 � M24 12 � M24 16 � M24 16 � M27 20 � M27 20 � M30 20 � M33 24 � M33 24 � M33 32 � M33
Max. screw tightening torque [Nm]
HG
PUR
32
�
49
�
76
�
52
�
77
�
147
�
103
�
203
�
137
�
226
�
301
�
271
�
393
�
330
�
529
�
631
�
627
�
595
�
703
�
Nominal screw tightening torques
Nominal screw tightening torques for EN 1092-1 (DIN 2501); calculated according to EN 1591-1:2014 for flanges according to EN 1092-1:2013
Nominal diameter
[mm]
[in]
1000
40
1200
48
Pressure rating [bar] PN 6 PN 10 PN 16 PN 25 PN 6 PN 10 PN 16
Screws
[mm] 28 � M27 28 � M33 28 � M39 28 � M52 32 � M30 32 � M36 32 � M45
Flange thickness
[mm] 38 44 59 63 42 55 78
Nom. screw tightening torque [Nm]
HG 175 350 630 1300 235 470 890
PUR 185 360 620 1290 250 480 900
PTFE � � � � � � �
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Installation
Nominal diameter
[mm]
[in]
1400
�
1600
�
1800
72
2000
�
2200
�
2400
�
Pressure rating [bar] PN 6 PN 10 PN 16 PN 6 PN 10 PN 16 PN 6 PN 10 PN 16 PN 6 PN 10 PN 16 PN 6 PN 10 PN 6 PN 10
Screws
[mm] 36 � M33 36 � M39 36 � M45 40 � M33 40 � M45 40 � M52 44 � M36 44 � M45 44 � M52 48 � M39 48 � M45 48 � M56 52 � M39 52 � M52 56 � M39 56 � M52
Flange thickness
[mm] 56 65 84 63 75 102 69 85 110 74 90 124 81 100 87 110
Nom. screw tightening torque [Nm]
HG
PUR
300
�
600
�
1050
�
340
�
810
�
1420
�
430
�
920
�
1600
�
530
�
1040
�
1900
�
580
�
1290
�
650
�
1410
�
PTFE � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � �
Nominal screw tightening torques for JIS B2220
Nominal diameter [mm] 350
400
450
500
600
700 750
Pressure rating [bar] 10K 20K 10K 20K 10K 20K 10K 20K 10K 20K 10K 10K
Screws [mm] 16 � M22 16 � M30�3 16 � M24 16 � M30�3 16 � M24 16 � M30�3 16 � M24 16 � M30�3 16 � M30 16 � M36�3 16 � M30 16 � M30
Nom. screw tightening torque [Nm]
HG
PUR
109
109
217
217
163
163
258
258
155
155
272
272
183
183
315
315
235
235
381
381
300
300
339
339
6.2.4 Turning the transmitter housing
To provide easier access to the connection compartment or display module, the transmitter housing can be turned.
Endress+Hauser
33
Installation
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP 4.
�ffnen �ffnen
unter
unter
Nicht
Nicht
ESC �
+
E
ESC �
+
E
re
re
a
a
3 mm 1. 2.
4 mm 3.
A0029993
1. Depending on the device version: Loosen the securing clamp of the connection compartment cover.
2. Unscrew the connection compartment cover. 3. Release the fixing screw. 4. Turn the housing to the desired position. 5. Firmly tighten the securing screw. 6. Screw on the connection compartment cover 7. Depending on the device version: Attach the securing clamp of the connection
compartment cover.
6.2.5 Turning the display module
The display module can be turned to optimize display readability and operability.
�ffnen �ffnen
unter
unter
Nicht
Nicht
ESC �
+
E
ESC �
+
E
ESC �
+
E
re
re
a
a
3 mm 1.
3.
2.
A0030035
1. Depending on the device version: Loosen the securing clamp of the connection compartment cover.
2. Unscrew the connection compartment cover. 3. Turn the display module to the desired position: max. 8 � 45� in each direction. 4. Screw on the connection compartment cover. 5. Depending on the device version: Attach the securing clamp of the connection
compartment cover.
34
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Installation
6.3 Post-installation check
Is the device undamaged (visual inspection)?
Does the measuring device conform to the measuring point specifications?
For example:
� Process temperature
� Process pressure (refer to the section on "Pressure-temperature ratings" in the "Technical
Information" document)
� Ambient temperature
� Measuring range
Has the correct orientation for the sensor been selected ?
� According to sensor type � According to medium temperature
� According to medium properties (outgassing, with entrained solids)
Does the arrow on the sensor nameplate match the direction of flow of the fluid through the piping ?
Are the measuring point identification and labeling correct (visual inspection)?
Is the device adequately protected from precipitation and direct sunlight?
Have the fixing screws been tightened with the correct tightening torque?
Endress+Hauser
35
Electrical connection
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
7
Electrical connection
NOTICE The measuring device does not have an internal circuit breaker.
For this reason, assign the measuring device a switch or power-circuit breaker so that
the power supply line can be easily disconnected from the mains.
Although the measuring device is equipped with a fuse, additional overcurrent
protection (maximum 10 A) should be integrated into the system installation.
7.1 Connection conditions
7.1.1 Required tools
� For cable entries: Use corresponding tools � For securing clamp: Allen key 3 mm � Wire stripper � When using stranded cables: Crimper for wire end ferrule � For removing cables from terminal: Flat blade screwdriver 3 mm (0.12 in)
7.1.2 Requirements for connecting cable
The connecting cables provided by the customer must fulfill the following requirements.
Electrical safety In accordance with applicable federal/national regulations.
Protective ground cable Cable 2.08 mm2 (14 AWG) The grounding impedance must be less than 1 .
Permitted temperature range � The installation guidelines that apply in the country of installation must be observed. � The cables must be suitable for the minimum and maximum temperatures to be
expected.
Power supply cable Standard installation cable is sufficient.
Signal cable EtherNet/IP The standard ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2 Annex specifies CAT 5 as the minimum category for a cable used for EtherNet/IP. CAT 5e and CAT 6 are recommended.
For more information on planning and installing EtherNet/IP networks, please refer to the "Media Planning and Installation Manual. EtherNet/IP" of ODVA Organization Current output 0/4 to 20 mA Standard installation cable is sufficient. Pulse/frequency/switch output Standard installation cable is sufficient.
36
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Electrical connection
Relay output Standard installation cable is sufficient.
Current input 0/4 to 20 mA Standard installation cable is sufficient.
Status input Standard installation cable is sufficient.
Cable diameter � Cable glands supplied:
M20 � 1.5 with cable 6 to 12 mm (0.24 to 0.47 in) � Spring-loaded terminals: Suitable for strands and strands with ferrules.
Conductor cross-section 0.2 to 2.5 mm2 (24 to 12 AWG).
Requirements for the connecting cable � Remote display and operating module DKX001
Optionally available connecting cable A cable is supplied depending on the order option � Order code for measuring device: order code 030 for "Display; operation", option O
or � Order code for measuring device: order code 030 for "Display; operation", option M
and � Order code for DKX001: order code 040 for "Cable", option A, B, D, E
Standard cable
Flame resistance Oil-resistance Shielding Capacitance: core/shield L/R Available cable length Operating temperature
2 � 2 � 0.34 mm2 (22 AWG) PVC cable with common shield (2 pairs, pairstranded)
According to DIN EN 60332-1-2
According to DIN EN 60811-2-1
Tin-plated copper-braid, optical cover 85 %
200 pF/m
24 �H/
5 m (15 ft)/10 m (35 ft)/20 m (65 ft)/30 m (100 ft)
When mounted in a fixed position: �50 to +105 �C (�58 to +221 �F); when cable can move freely: �25 to +105 �C (�13 to +221 �F)
Standard cable - customer-specific cable No cable is supplied, and it must be provided by the customer (up to max. 300 m (1 000 ft)) for the following order option: Order code for DKX001: Order code 040 for "Cable", option 1 "None, provided by customer, max 300 m" A standard cable can be used as the connecting cable.
Standard cable Shielding Capacitance: core/shield L/R Cable length
4 cores (2 pairs); pair-stranded with common shield Tin-plated copper-braid, optical cover 85 % Maximum 1 000 nF for Zone 1, Class I, Division 1 Maximum 24 �H/ for Zone 1, Class I, Division 1 Maximum 300 m (1 000 ft), see the following table
Endress+Hauser
37
Electrical connection
Cross-section
0.34 mm2 (22 AWG) 0.50 mm2 (20 AWG) 0.75 mm2 (18 AWG) 1.00 mm2 (17 AWG) 1.50 mm2 (15 AWG)
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Max. cable length for use in Non-hazardous area, Ex Zone 2, Class I, Division 2 Ex Zone 1, Class I, Division 1 80 m (270 ft) 120 m (400 ft) 180 m (600 ft) 240 m (800 ft) 300 m (1 000 ft)
38
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Electrical connection
7.1.3 Terminal assignment
Transmitter: supply voltage, input/outputs The terminal assignment of the inputs and outputs depends on the individual order version of the device. The device-specific terminal assignment is documented on an adhesive label in the terminal cover.
Supply voltage
1 (+)
2 (�)
Input/output 1
EtherNet/IP (RJ45 connector)
Input/output 2
Input/output 3
24 (+)
25 (�)
22 (+)
23 (�)
Device-specific terminal assignment: adhesive label in terminal cover.
Terminal assignment of the remote display and operating module 46.
7.1.4 Device plugs available
Device plugs may not be used in hazardous areas!
Order code for "Input; output 1", option NA "EtherNet/IP"
Order code for "Electrical connection"
L, N, P, U R 1) 2), S 1) 2), T 1) 2), V 1) 2)
Cable entry/connection
2
3
Connector M12 � 1
�
Connector M12 � 1
Connector M12 � 1
1) Cannot be combined with an external WLAN antenna (order code for "Enclosed accessories", option P8) of an RJ45 M12 adapter for the service interface (order code for "Accessories mounted", option NB) or of the remote display and operating module DKX001
2) Suitable for integrating the device in a ring topology.
7.1.5 Pin assignment of device plug
2
Pin
1+
2+
1
3
3-
4-
4
A0032047
Coding
D
Assignment Tx Rx Tx Rx
Plug/socket Socket
7.1.6 Preparing the measuring device
NOTICE Insufficient sealing of the housing! Operational reliability of the measuring device could be compromised.
Use suitable cable glands corresponding to the degree of protection.
1. Remove dummy plug if present.
Endress+Hauser
39
Electrical connection 40
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
2. If the measuring device is supplied without cable glands: Provide suitable cable gland for corresponding connecting cable.
3. If the measuring device is supplied with cable glands: Observe requirements for connecting cables 36.
7.2 Connecting the measuring device
NOTICE Limitation of electrical safety due to incorrect connection!
Have electrical connection work carried out by appropriately trained specialists only. Observe applicable federal/national installation codes and regulations. Comply with local workplace safety regulations. Always connect the protective ground cable before connecting additional cables. For use in potentially explosive atmospheres, observe the information in the device-
specific Ex documentation.
7.2.1 Connecting the transmitter
1 2 3 4
A0026781
1 Terminal connection for supply voltage 2 Terminal connection for signal transmission, input/output 3 Terminal connection for signal transmission, input/output or terminal connection for network connection via
service interface (CDI-RJ45); optional: connection for external WLAN antenna or remote display and operating module DKX001 4 Protective earth (PE)
In addition to connecting the device via EtherNet/IP and the available inputs/outputs, additional connection options are also available: � Integrate into a network via the service interface (CDI-RJ45) 44. � Integrate the device into a ring topology 45.
Connecting the EtherNet/IP connector
3.
�ffnen �ffnen
unter
unter
Nicht
Nicht
ESC �
+
E
e
ar
4.
ESC �
+
E
ESC �
+
E
2.
3 mm 1.
3.
1. Loosen the securing clamp of the connection compartment cover. 2. Unscrew the connection compartment cover. 3. Squeeze the tabs of the display module holder together.
e
ar
A0029813
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP 4. Remove the display module holder.
Electrical connection
NSNsDeonpieocueahpnrsngtaontsiutezunoneoPntpdsugeoievrow�nrniferfwnrheenn I/O
5.
ESC �
+
E
e
Nicht
unter
ar
6.
eNNSDsnoepioceuahprnsngtaontiuszteuPneonontdopsuegwievro�nrenifrrfwnheenn I/O
NSNsDeonpieocueahpnrsngtaontsiutezunoneoPntpdsugeoievrow�nrniferfwnrheenn I/O
ESC �
+ E
5. Attach the holder to the edge of the electronics compartment. 6. Open the terminal cover.
11. 22 mm
24 mm
9.
7.
�ffnen
unter
Nicht
8.
NSNsDeonpieocueahpnrsngtaontsiutezunoneoPntpdsugeoievrow�nrniferfwnrheenn
42 (1.6)
10.
e
ar
�ffnen �ffnen
e
Nicht
unter
ar
A0029814
A0033722
7. Push the cable through the cable entry . To ensure tight sealing, do not remove the sealing ring from the cable entry.
8. Strip the cable and cable ends and connect to the RJ45 connector. 9. Connect the protective ground. 10. Plug in the RJ45 connector. 11. Firmly tighten the cable glands.
This concludes the EtherNet/IP connection process.
Endress+Hauser
41
Electrical connection
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Connecting the supply voltage and additional inputs/outputs
1.
2.
10 (0.4)
�ffnen
unter
Nicht
mm (in)
e
3.
ESC �
+
E
A0033983
1. Push the cable through the cable entry . To ensure tight sealing, do not remove the sealing ring from the cable entry.
2. Strip the cable and cable ends. In the case of stranded cables, also fit ferrules. 3. Connect the protective ground.
5.
ar ar
�ffnen
unter
Nicht
e
22 mm 24 mm
4.
ESC �
+
E
A0033984
4. Connect the cable in accordance with the terminal assignment . Signal cable terminal assignment: The device-specific terminal assignment is documented on an adhesive label in the terminal cover. Supply voltage terminal assignment: Adhesive label in the terminal cover or 39.
5. Firmly tighten the cable glands. This concludes the cable connection process.
6. Close the terminal cover. 7. Fit the display module holder in the electronics compartment. 8. Screw on the connection compartment cover. 9. Secure the securing clamp of the connection compartment cover.
42
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP Removing a cable
3 (0.12) 1.
Electrical connection
2.
7 Engineering unit mm (in)
A0029598
1. To remove a cable from the terminal, use a flat-blade screwdriver to push the slot between the two terminal holes
2. while simultaneously pulling the cable end out of the terminal.
Endress+Hauser
43
Electrical connection
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
7.2.2 Integrating the transmitter into a network
This section only presents the basic options for integrating the device into a network. For information on the procedure to follow to connect the transmitter correctly 40.
Integrating via the service interface The device is integrated via the connection to the service interface (CDI-RJ45). Note the following when connecting: � Recommended cable: CAT 5e, CAT 6 or CAT 7, with shielded connector (e.g. brand:
YAMAICHI ; Part No Y-ConProfixPlug63 / Prod. ID: 82-006660) � Maximum cable thickness: 6 mm � Length of connector including bend protection: 42 mm � Bending radius: 5 x cable thickness
�ffnen
NSNsDeonpieocueahpnrsngtaontsiutezunoneoPntpdsugeoievrow�nrniferfwnrheenn I/O
unter
Nicht
e
ar
42 (1.6)
1
1 Service interface (CDI-RJ45)
A0033703
An adapter for RJ45 and the M12 connector is optionally available: Order code for "Accessories", option NB: "Adapter RJ45 M12 (service interface)" The adapter connects the service interface (CDI-RJ45) to an M12 connector mounted in the cable entry. Therefore the connection to the service interface can be established via an M12 connector without opening the device.
44
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Electrical connection
Integrating into a ring topology The device is integrated via the terminal connection for signal transmission (output 1) and the connection to the service interface (CDI-RJ45). Note the following when connecting: � Recommended cable: CAT5e, CAT6 or CAT7, with shielded connector (e.g. brand:
YAMAICHI ; Part No Y-ConProfixPlug63 / Prod. ID: 82-006660) � Maximum cable thickness: 6 mm � Length of connector including bend protection: 42 mm � Bending radius: 2.5 x cable thickness
�ffnen
NSNsDeonpieocueahpnrsngtaontsiutezunoneoPntpdsugeoievrow�nrniferfwnrheenn
unter
Nicht
e
ar
42 (1.6)
1 2
1 EtherNet/IP connection 2 Service interface (CDI-RJ45)
A0033717
An adapter for RJ45 and the M12 connector is optionally available: Order code for "Accessories", option NB: "Adapter RJ45 M12 (service interface)" The adapter connects the service interface (CDI-RJ45) to an M12 connector mounted in the cable entry. Therefore the connection to the service interface can be established via an M12 connector without opening the device.
Endress+Hauser
45
Electrical connection
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
7.2.3 Connecting the remote display and operating module DKX001
The remote display and operating module DKX001 is available as an optional extra 175. � The measuring device is always supplied with a dummy cover when the remote
display and operating module DKX001 is ordered directly with the measuring device. Display or operation at the transmitter is not possible in this case. � If ordered subsequently, the remote display and operating module DKX001 may not be connected at the same time as the existing measuring device display module. Only one display or operation unit may be connected to the transmitter at any one time.
Gnd
Vcc
AB 81 82 83 84 1 2
3
4 5
1 Remote display and operating module DKX001 2 Protective earth (PE) 3 Connecting cable 4 Measuring device 5 Protective earth (PE)
Vcc
Gnd
81 82 83 84 AB
A0027518
7.3 Ensuring potential equalization
7.3.1 Requirements LCAUTION
Electrode damage can result in the complete failure of the device!
Same electrical potential for the fluid and sensor Company-internal grounding concepts Pipe material and grounding
7.3.2 Connection example, standard scenario
Metal, grounded pipe
8 Potential equalization via measuring tube
46
A0016315
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Electrical connection
7.3.3 Connection example in special situations
Unlined and ungrounded metal pipe This connection method also applies in situations where: � The customary potential equalization is not used � Equalizing currents are present
Ground cable
Copper wire, at least 6 mm2 (0.0093 in2)
DN 300 DN 350 9 Potential equalization via ground terminal and pipe flanges
A0029338
1. Connect both sensor flanges to the pipe flange via a ground cable and ground them. 2. If DN 300 (12"): Mount the ground cable directly on the conductive flange coating
of the sensor with the flange screws. 3. If DN 350 (14"): Mount the ground cable directly on the metal transport bracket.
Observe screw tightening torques: see the Sensor Brief Operating Instructions. 4. Connect the connection housing of the transmitter or sensor to ground potential by
means of the ground terminal provided for the purpose.
Plastic pipe or pipe with insulating liner This connection method also applies in situations where: � The customary potential equalization is not used � Equalizing currents are present
Ground cable
Copper wire, at least 6 mm2 (0.0093 in2)
Endress+Hauser
10 Potential equalization via ground terminal and ground disks
A0029339
1. Connect the ground disks to the ground terminal via the ground cable. 2. Connect the ground disks to ground potential.
Pipe with a cathodic protection unit This connection method is only used if the following two conditions are met: � Metal pipe without liner or pipe with electrically conductive liner � Cathodic protection is integrated in the personal protection equipment
47
Electrical connection
Ground cable
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Copper wire, at least 6 mm2 (0.0093 in2)
+ �
A0029340
Prerequisite: The sensor is installed in the pipe in a way that provides electrical insulation. 1. Connect the two flanges of the pipe to one another via a ground cable. 2. Guide the shield of the signal lines through a capacitor. 3. Connect the measuring device to the power supply such that it is floating in relation
to the protective ground (isolation transformer).
7.4 Special connection instructions
7.4.1 Connection examples
EtherNet/IP
1
2
3
4
5
11 Connection example for EtherNet/IP
1 Control system (e.g. PLC) 2 Ethernet switch 3 Observe cable specifications 4 Device plug 5 Transmitter
5
A0028767
48
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP EtherNet/IP: DLR (Device Level Ring)
1
Electrical connection
2
345
4
1 Control system (e.g. PLC) 2 Ethernet switch 3 Observe cable specifications 36 4 Transmitter 5 Connecting cable between the two transmitters
Current output 4-20 mA
1
2
4...20 mA
12 Connection example for 4-20 mA current output (active) 1 Automation system with current input (e.g. PLC) 2 Analog display unit: observe maximum load 3 Transmitter
1
2
3
4...20 mA
13 Connection example for 4-20 mA current output (passive) 1 Automation system with current input (e.g. PLC) 2 Active barrier for power supply (e.g. RN221N) 3 Analog display unit: observe maximum load 4 Transmitter
A0027544
3
A0028758
4
A0028759
Endress+Hauser
49
Electrical connection
Pulse/frequency output
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
1
2
12345
14 Connection example for pulse/frequency output (passive) 1 Automation system with pulse/frequency input (e.g. PLC) 2 Power supply 3 Transmitter: Observe input values 185
Switch output
3
A0028761
1
2
15 Connection example for switch output (passive) 1 Automation system with switch input (e.g. PLC) 2 Power supply 3 Transmitter: Observe input values 185
Relay output
3
A0028760
1
2
16 Connection example for relay output (passive)
1 Automation system with relay input (e.g. PLC) 2 Power supply 3 Transmitter: Observe input values 186
3
A0028760
50
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Current input
1
2
3
Electrical connection
4
17 Connection example for 4 to 20 mA current input 1 Power supply 2 Terminal box 3 External measuring device (to read in pressure or temperature, for instance) 4 Transmitter
Status input
A0028915
1
2
3
18 Connection example for status input
1 Automation system with status output (e.g. PLC) 2 Power supply 3 Transmitter
A0028764
7.5 Hardware settings
7.5.1 Setting the device address
The IP address of the measuring device can be configured for the network via DIP switches.
Addressing data
IP address and configuration options
1st octet
2nd octet
3rd octet
192.
168.
1.
Can only be configured via software addressing
4th octet
XXX
Can be configured via software addressing and hardware addressing
IP address range IP address broadcast
1 to 254 (4th octet) 255
Endress+Hauser
51
Electrical connection
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Addressing mode ex works
IP address ex works
Software addressing; all DIP switches for hardware addressing are set to OFF. DHCP server active
Software addressing: The IP address is entered via the IP address parameter ( 97).
Setting the IP address Risk of electric shock when opening the transmitter housing.
Before opening the transmitter housing: Disconnect the device from the power supply.
The default IP address may not be activated 52.
IP Address setting (last octet)
1
128
2
64
3
32
4
16
5
8
6
4
7
2
8
1
A0029635
1. Depending on the housing version, loosen the securing clamp or fixing screw of the housing cover.
2. Depending on the housing version, unscrew or open the housing cover and disconnect the local display from the main electronics module where necessary.
3. Set the desired IP address using the corresponding DIP switches on the I/O electronics module.
4. Reverse the removal procedure to reassemble the transmitter. 5. Reconnect the device to the power supply.
The configured device address is used once the device is restarted.
7.5.2 Activating the default IP address
The DHCP function is enabled in the device at the factory, i.e. the device expects an IP address to be assigned by the network. This function can be disabled and the device can be set to the default IP address 192.168.1.212 by DIP switch.
Activating the default IP address by DIP switch Risk of electric shock when opening the transmitter housing.
Before opening the transmitter housing: Disconnect the device from the power supply.
52
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Electrical connection
Off On
1
2
3
4
A0034499
1. Depending on the housing version, loosen the securing clamp or fixing screw of the housing cover.
2. Depending on the housing version, unscrew or open the housing cover and disconnect the local display from the main electronics module where necessary .
3. Set DIP switch No. 2 on the I/O electronics module from OFF ON. 4. Reverse the removal procedure to reassemble the transmitter. 5. Reconnect the device to the power supply.
The default IP address is used once the device is restarted.
7.6 Ensuring the degree of protection
The measuring device fulfills all the requirements for the IP66/67 degree of protection, Type 4X enclosure.
To guarantee IP66/67 degree of protection, Type 4X enclosure, carry out the following steps after the electrical connection: 1. Check that the housing seals are clean and fitted correctly. 2. Dry, clean or replace the seals if necessary. 3. Tighten all housing screws and screw covers. 4. Firmly tighten the cable glands. 5. To ensure that moisture does not enter the cable entry:
Route the cable so that it loops down before the cable entry ("water trap").
Endress+Hauser
6. Insert dummy plugs into unused cable entries.
7.7 Post-connection check
Are cables or the device undamaged (visual inspection)? Do the cables used meet the requirements? Do the cables have adequate strain relief? Are all the cable glands installed, firmly tightened and leak-tight? Cable run with "water trap" 53?
A0029278
53
Electrical connection
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
If supply voltage is present, do values appear on the display module?
Is the potential equalization established correctly ?
54
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
8
Operation options
8.1 Overview of operation options
Operation options
ESC
-
+
E
1
2
3
4
5
6
A0034513
1 Local operation via display module 2 Computer with Web browser (e.g. Internet Explorer) or with operating tool (e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare, AMS
Device Manager, SIMATIC PDM) 3 Field Xpert SFX350 or SFX370 4 Field Xpert SMT70 5 Mobile handheld terminal 6 Control system (e.g. PLC)
Endress+Hauser
55
Operation options 56
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
8.2 Structure and function of the operating menu
8.2.1 Structure of the operating menu
For an overview of the operating menu for experts: "Description of Device Parameters" document supplied with the device 211
Operator
Maintenance
Operating menu for operators and maintenances
Language
Operatation
Language
Parameter 1
Parameter n Submenu 1
Setup Diagnostics
Submenu n Device tag Wizard 1 / Parameter 1 Wizard n / Parameter n Advanced setup
Parameter 1 Parameter n Submenu 1 Submenu n
Enter access code Parameter 1 Parameter n Submenu 1 Submenu n
Operating menu for experts
Expert
Access status display
Parameter n System Sensor Input Output Communication Application Diagnostics
Expert
19 Schematic structure of the operating menu
Function-oriented
Task-oriented
A0018237-EN
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Operation options
8.2.2 Operating philosophy
The individual parts of the operating menu are assigned to certain user roles (operator, maintenance etc.). Each user role contains typical tasks within the device lifecycle.
Menu/parameter
Language
task-oriented
Operation Setup
Diagnostics
User role and tasks Role "Operator", "Maintenance" Tasks during operation: � Configuring the operational
display � Reading measured values
"Maintenance" role Commissioning: � Configuration of the
measurement � Configuration of the inputs and
outputs � Configuration of the
communication interface
"Maintenance" role Fault elimination: � Diagnostics and elimination of
process and device errors � Measured value simulation
Content/meaning
� Defining the operating language � Defining the Web server operating language � Resetting and controlling totalizers
� Configuring the operational display (e.g. display format, display contrast) � Resetting and controlling totalizers
Wizards for fast commissioning: � Setting the system units � Displaying the I/O/configuration � Configuring the inputs � Configuring the outputs � Configuration of the operational display � Setting the low flow cut off � Configuring empty pipe detection
Advanced setup � For more customized configuration of the measurement (adaptation to
special measuring conditions) � Configuration of totalizers � Configuration of electrode cleaning (optional) � Configuring the WLAN settings � Administration (define access code, reset measuring device)
Contains all parameters for error detection and analyzing process and device errors: � Diagnostic list
Contains up to 5 currently pending diagnostic messages. � Event logbook
Contains event messages that have occurred. � Device information
Contains information for identifying the device. � Measured values
Contains all current measured values. � Data logging submenu with "Extended HistoROM" order option
Storage and visualization of measured values � Heartbeat
The functionality of the device is checked on demand and the verification results are documented. � Simulation Is used to simulate measured values or output values.
Expert
function-oriented
Tasks that require detailed knowledge of the function of the device: � Commissioning measurements
under difficult conditions � Optimal adaptation of the
measurement to difficult conditions � Detailed configuration of the communication interface � Error diagnostics in difficult cases
Contains all the parameters of the device and makes it possible to access these parameters directly using an access code. The structure of this menu is based on the function blocks of the device: � System
Contains all higher-order device parameters which do not concern the measurement or the communication interface. � Sensor Configuration of the measurement. � Input Configuration of the status input. � Output Configuration of the analog current outputs as well as the pulse/frequency and switch output. � Communication Configuration of the digital communication interface and the Web server. � Application Configuration of the functions that go beyond the actual measurement (e.g. totalizer). � Diagnostics Error detection and analysis of process and device errors and for device simulation and Heartbeat Technology.
Endress+Hauser
57
Operation options 58
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
8.3 Access to the operating menu via the local display
8.3.1 Operational display
1
2 XXXXXXXXX
F 3
1120.50
4
l/h
5
1 Operational display 2 Device tag 95 3 Status area 4 Display area for measured values (4-line) 5 Operating elements 63
A0029346
Status area The following symbols appear in the status area of the operational display at the top right: � Status signals 147
� F: Failure � C: Function check � S: Out of specification � M: Maintenance required � Diagnostic behavior 148 � : Alarm � : Warning � : Locking (the device is locked via the hardware ) � : Communication (communication via remote operation is active)
Display area In the display area, each measured value is prefaced by certain symbol types for further description:
Example
Measured variable
Measurement channel number
Diagnostic behavior
Appears only if a diagnostics event is present for this measured variable.
Measured values
Symbol
Meaning Volume flow
Conductivity
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Operation options
Endress+Hauser
Mass flow
Totalizer
The measurement channel number indicates which of the three totalizers is displayed.
Output
The measurement channel number indicates which of the outputs is displayed.
Status input
Measurement channel numbers
Symbol
Meaning Measurement channel 1 to 4
The measurement channel number is displayed only if more than one channel is present for the same measured variable type (e.g. Totalizer 1 to 3).
Diagnostic behavior
The diagnostic behavior pertains to a diagnostic event that is relevant to the displayed measured variable. For information on the symbols 148
The number and display format of the measured values can be configured via the Format display parameter ( 111).
8.3.2 Navigation view
In the submenu 1
2
/../Operation
0091-1 3 2
Access stat.disp
Operator
Locking status
Display
4
In the wizard 1
/../Curr. output 1 Assign curr.
S3
Volume flow
4
5
1 Navigation view 2 Navigation path to current position 3 Status area 4 Display area for navigation 5 Operating elements 63
5
A0013993-EN
A0016327-EN
Navigation path The navigation path - displayed at the top left in the navigation view - consists of the following elements:
� In the submenu: Display symbol for menu
� In the wizard: Display symbol for wizard
Omission symbol for operating menu levels in between
Name of current � Submenu � Wizard � Parameters
Examples
/ ../
Display
59
Operation options 60
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
/ ../
Display
For more information about the icons in the menu, refer to the "Display area" section 60
Status area The following appears in the status area of the navigation view in the top right corner: � In the submenu
� The direct access code for the parameter you are navigating to (e.g. 0022-1) � If a diagnostic event is present, the diagnostic behavior and status signal � In the wizard If a diagnostic event is present, the diagnostic behavior and status signal
� For information on the diagnostic behavior and status signal 147 � For information on the function and entry of the direct access code 65
Display area
Menus
Symbol
Meaning
Operation Appears: � In the menu next to the "Operation" selection � At the left in the navigation path in the Operation menu
Setup Appears: � In the menu next to the "Setup" selection � At the left in the navigation path in the Setup menu
Diagnostics Appears: � In the menu next to the "Diagnostics" selection � At the left in the navigation path in the Diagnostics menu
Expert Appears: � In the menu next to the "Expert" selection � At the left in the navigation path in the Expert menu
Submenus, wizards, parameters
Symbol
Meaning Submenu
Wizard
Locking
Symbol
Parameters within a wizard
No display symbol exists for parameters in submenus.
Meaning Parameter locked When displayed in front of a parameter name, indicates that the parameter is locked. � By a user-specific access code � By the hardware write protection switch
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Operation options
Wizard operation
Symbol
Meaning Switches to the previous parameter.
Confirms the parameter value and switches to the next parameter.
Opens the editing view of the parameter.
8.3.3 Editing view
Numeric editor
1
0
1
2
5
6
+
�
3
+0.000 Xx
2
3
4
7
8
9
4
20 For entering values in parameters (e.g. limit values) 1 Entry display area 2 Input screen 3 Confirm, delete or reject entry 4 Operating elements
Text editor
1 Xxxxxxx ABCDE FGH I JK
2 L MNOPQR S T U VW XY Z
3
5 4
21 For entering text in parameters (e.g. tag name) 1 Entry display area 2 Current input screen 3 Change input screen 4 Operating elements 5 Move entry position 6 Delete entry 7 Reject or confirm entry
A0034250
6 7
A0034114
Endress+Hauser
61
Operation options
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Using the operating elements in the editing view
Operating key(s) Meaning
Minus key Move the entry position to the left.
Plus key Move the entry position to the right.
Enter key � Press the key briefly: confirm your selection. � Press the key for 2 s: confirm the entry.
+
Escape key combination (press keys simultaneously) Close the editing view without accepting the changes.
Input screens
Symbol
Meaning Upper case
Lower case Numbers
Punctuation marks and special characters: = + � * / � � � � � ( ) [ ] < > { }
Punctuation marks and special characters: ' " `^. , ; : ? ! % � � $ � � � @ # / \ I ~ & _
Umlauts and accents
Controlling data entries
Symbol
Meaning Move entry position Reject entry
Confirm entry
Delete character immediately to the left of the entry position Delete character immediately to the right of the entry position
Clear all the characters entered
62
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Operation options
8.3.4 Operating elements
Operating key(s) Meaning
Minus key
In a menu, submenu Moves the selection bar upwards in a picklist.
With a Wizard Confirms the parameter value and goes to the previous parameter.
With a text and numeric editor Move the entry position to the left.
Plus key
In a menu, submenu Moves the selection bar downwards in a picklist.
With a Wizard Confirms the parameter value and goes to the next parameter.
With a text and numeric editor Move the entry position to the right.
Enter key
For operational display Pressing the key briefly opens the operating menu.
In a menu, submenu � Pressing the key briefly:
� Opens the selected menu, submenu or parameter. � Starts the wizard. � If help text is open, closes the help text of the parameter. � Pressing the key for 2 s for parameter: If present, opens the help text for the function of the parameter.
With a Wizard Opens the editing view of the parameter.
With a text and numeric editor � Press the key briefly: confirm your selection. � Press the key for 2 s: confirm the entry.
Escape key combination (press keys simultaneously)
In a menu, submenu
� Pressing the key briefly:
� Exits the current menu level and takes you to the next higher level.
� If help text is open, closes the help text of the parameter.
+
� Pressing the key for 2 s returns you to the operational display ("home position").
With a Wizard Exits the wizard and takes you to the next higher level.
With a text and numeric editor Close the editing view without accepting the changes.
Minus/Enter key combination (press the keys simultaneously)
� If the keypad lock is active:
+
Press the key for 3 s: deactivate the keypad lock.
� If the keypad lock is not active:
Press the key for 3 s: the context menu opens along with the option for activating the
keypad lock.
8.3.5 Opening the context menu
Using the context menu, the user can call up the following menus quickly and directly from the operational display: � Setup � Data backup � Simulation
Endress+Hauser
63
Operation options
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Calling up and closing the context menu
The user is in the operational display.
1. Press the and keys for longer than 3 seconds. The context menu opens.
XXXXXXXXXX Setup
Conf.backup
Simulation
Keylock on
l/h
2. Press + simultaneously. The context menu is closed and the operational display appears.
Calling up the menu via the context menu 1. Open the context menu. 2. Press to navigate to the desired menu. 3. Press to confirm the selection.
The selected menu opens.
A0034608-EN
64
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Operation options
Endress+Hauser
8.3.6 Navigating and selecting from list
Different operating elements are used to navigate through the operating menu. The navigation path is displayed on the left in the header. Icons are displayed in front of the individual menus. These icons are also shown in the header during navigation.
For an explanation of the navigation view with symbols and operating elements 59 Example: Setting the number of displayed measured values to "2 values"
XXXXXXXXX
20.50
Main menu
0104-1
Language
1.
English
Display/operat.
Setup
Main menu
Language
2.
Display/operat.
Setup
/ ../Display/operat. 0091-1
Access stat.disp
3.
Operator
Locking status Display
/ ../Display/operat.
Locking status
4.
Display
/ ../Display
0098-1
Format display
5.
1 value, max.
Contrast display
Display intervall
/ ../Format display 0098-1
1 value, max.
6.
Bargr. + 1 value
2 values Val. large+2val.
/ ../Format display 0098-1
1 value, max.
7.
Bargr. + 1 value
2 values
Val. large+2val.
XXXXXXXXX
10.50
8.
2 s
mA
2800
Hz
A0029562-EN
8.3.7 Calling the parameter directly
A parameter number is assigned to every parameter to be able to access a parameter directly via the onsite display. Entering this access code in the Direct access parameter calls up the desired parameter directly. Navigation path Expert Direct access
65
Operation options
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
The direct access code consists of a 5-digit number (at maximum) and the channel number, which identifies the channel of a process variable: e.g. 00914-2. In the navigation view, this appears on the right-hand side in the header of the selected parameter.
00914-2
1
1 Direct access code
A0029414
Note the following when entering the direct access code: � The leading zeros in the direct access code do not have to be entered.
Example: Enter "914" instead of "00914" � If no channel number is entered, channel 1 is accessed automatically.
Example: Enter 00914 Assign process variable parameter � If a different channel is accessed: Enter the direct access code with the corresponding
channel number. Example: Enter 00914-2 Assign process variable parameter
For the direct access codes of the individual parameters, see the "Description of Device Parameters" document for the device
8.3.8 Calling up help text
Help text is available for some parameters and can be called up from the navigation view. The help text provides a brief explanation of the parameter function and thereby supports swift and safe commissioning.
Calling up and closing the help text The user is in the navigation view and the selection bar is on a parameter. 1. Press for 2 s.
The help text for the selected parameter opens.
Ent. access code Enter access code to disable write protec.
22 Example: Help text for parameter "Enter access code"
2. Press + simultaneously. The help text is closed.
A0014002-EN
8.3.9 Changing the parameters
Parameters can be changed via the numeric editor or text editor. � Numeric editor: Change values in a parameter, e.g. specifications for limit values. � Text editor: Enter text in a parameter, e.g. tag name. A message is displayed if the value entered is outside the permitted value range.
66
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Operation options
Endress+Hauser
Ent. access code Invalid or out of range input value Min:0 Max:9999
A0014049-EN
For a description of the editing view - consisting of the text editor and numeric editor - with symbols 61, for a description of the operating elements 63
8.3.10 User roles and related access authorization
The two user roles "Operator" and "Maintenance" have different write access to the parameters if the customer defines a user-specific access code. This protects the device configuration via the local display from unauthorized access 130.
Defining access authorization for user roles
An access code is not yet defined when the device is delivered from the factory. Access authorization (read and write access) to the device is not restricted and corresponds to the "Maintenance" user role.
Define the access code.
The "Operator" user role is redefined in addition to the "Maintenance" user role. Access authorization differs for the two user roles.
Access authorization to parameters: "Maintenance" user role
Access code status
An access code has not yet been defined (factory setting).
After an access code has been defined.
Read access
Write access
1)
1) The user only has write access after entering the access code.
Access authorization to parameters: "Operator" user role
Access code status After an access code has been defined.
Read access
Write access �� 1)
1) Despite the defined access code, certain parameters can always be modified and thus are excepted from the write protection, as they do not affect the measurement. Refer to the "Write protection via access code" section
The user role with which the user is currently logged on is indicated by the Access status parameter. Navigation path: Operation Access status
8.3.11 Disabling write protection via access code
If the -symbol appears on the local display in front of a parameter, the parameter is write-protected by a user-specific access code and its value cannot be changed at the moment using local operation 130.
Parameter write protection via local operation can be disabled by entering the user-specific access code in the Enter access code parameter ( 116) via the respective access option. 1. After you press , the input prompt for the access code appears.
67
Operation options
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
2. Enter the access code. The -symbol in front of the parameters disappears; all previously writeprotected parameters are now re-enabled.
8.3.12 Enabling and disabling the keypad lock
The keypad lock makes it possible to block access to the entire operating menu via local operation. As a result, it is no longer possible to navigate through the operating menu or change the values of individual parameters. Users can only read the measured values on the operational display. The keypad lock is switched on and off via the context menu.
Switching on the keypad lock The keypad lock is switched on automatically: � If the device has not been operated via the display for > 1 minute. � Each time the device is restarted.
To activate the keylock manually: 1. The device is in the measured value display.
Press the and keys for 3 seconds. A context menu appears. 2. In the context menu select the Keylock on option. The keypad lock is switched on. If the user attempts to access the operating menu while the keypad lock is active, the Keylock on message appears.
Switching off the keypad lock
The keypad lock is switched on.
Press the and keys for 3 seconds. The keypad lock is switched off.
8.4 Access to the operating menu via the Web browser
8.4.1 Function range
Thanks to the integrated Web server, the device can be operated and configured via a Web browser and via a service interface (CDI-RJ45) or via a WLAN interface. The structure of the operating menu is the same as for the local display. In addition to the measured values, status information on the device is also displayed and allows the user to monitor the status of the device. Furthermore the device data can be managed and the network parameters can be configured. A device that has a WLAN interface (can be ordered as an option) is required for the WLAN connection: order code for "Display; operation", option G "4-line, illuminated; touch control + WLAN". The device acts as an Access Point and enables communication by computer or a mobile handheld terminal.
For additional information on the Web server, refer to the Special Documentation for the device
68
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Operation options
8.4.2 Prerequisites
Computer hardware
Hardware
Interface Connection Screen
Interface
CDI-RJ45
WLAN
The computer must have an RJ45 interface.
The operating unit must have a WLAN interface.
Standard Ethernet cable with RJ45 connector.
Connection via Wireless LAN.
Recommended size: 12" (depends on the screen resolution)
Computer software
Software Recommended operating systems
Web browsers supported
Interface
CDI-RJ45
WLAN
� Microsoft Windows 7 or higher. � Mobile operating systems:
� iOS � Android
Microsoft Windows XP is supported.
� Microsoft Internet Explorer 8 or higher � Microsoft Edge � Mozilla Firefox � Google Chrome � Safari
Computer settings
Settings User rights Proxy server settings of the Web browser JavaScript
Network connections
Interface
CDI-RJ45
WLAN
Appropriate user rights (e.g. administrator rights) for TCP/IP and proxy server settings are necessary (for adjusting the IP address, subnet mask etc.).
The Web browser setting Use a Proxy Server for Your LAN must be deselected .
JavaScript must be enabled.
If JavaScript cannot be enabled: enter http://192.168.1.212/basic.html in the address line of the Web browser. A fully functional but simplified version of the operating menu structure starts in the Web browser.
When installing a new firmware version: To enable correct data display, clear the temporary memory (cache) of the Web browser under Internet options.
Only the active network connections to the measuring device should be used.
Switch off all other network connections such as WLAN.
Switch off all other network connections.
In the event of connection problems: 144
Endress+Hauser
69
Operation options
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Measuring device: Via CDI-RJ45 service interface
Device Measuring device Web server
CDI-RJ45 service interface
The measuring device has an RJ45 interface.
Web server must be enabled; factory setting: ON
For information on enabling the Web server 75
IP address
If the IP address of the device is not known: � The IP address can be read out via local operation:
Diagnostics Device information IP address � Communication with the Web server can be established via the default IP
address 192.168.1.212. The DHCP function is enabled in the device at the factory, i.e. the device expects an IP address to be assigned by the network. This function can be disabled and the device can be set to the default IP address 192.168.1.212: set DIP switch No. 4 from OFF ON.
Set the default IP address 52.
Measuring device: via WLAN interface
Device Measuring device
Web server
WLAN interface
The measuring device has a WLAN antenna: � Transmitter with integrated WLAN antenna � Transmitter with external WLAN antenna
Web server and WLAN must be enabled; factory setting: ON
For information on enabling the Web server 75
IP address
If the IP address of the device is not known: � The IP address can be read out via local operation:
Diagnostics Device information IP address � Communication with the Web server can be established via the default IP
address 192.168.1.212. The DHCP function is enabled in the device at the factory, i.e. the device expects an IP address to be assigned by the network. This function can be disabled and the device can be set to the default IP address 192.168.1.212: set DIP switch No. 4 from OFF ON.
Set the default IP address 52.
8.4.3 Establishing a connection
Via service interface (CDI-RJ45) Preparing the measuring device 1. Depending on the housing version:
Release the securing clamp or securing screw of the housing cover. 2. Depending on the housing version:
Unscrew or open the housing cover. 3. The location of the connection socket depends on the measuring device and the
communication protocol: Connect the computer to the RJ45 connector via the standard Ethernet connecting cable .
70
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Operation options
Configuring the Internet protocol of the computer The IP address can be assigned to the measuring device in a variety of ways: � Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP), factory setting:
The IP address is automatically assigned to the measuring device by the automation system (DHCP server). � Hardware addressing: The IP address is set via DIP switches 51. � Software addressing: The IP address is entered via the IP address parameter ( 97) . � DIP switch for "Default IP address": To establish the network connection via the service interface (CDI-RJ45): the fixed IP address 192.168.1.212 is used 52. The measuring device works with the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP), on leaving the factory, i.e. the IP address of the measuring device is automatically assigned by the automation system (DHCP server). To establish a network connection via the service interface (CDI-RJ45): set the "Default IP address" DIP switch to ON. The measuring device then has the fixed IP address: 192.168.1.212. This address can now be used to establish the network connection.
1. Via DIP switch 2, activate the default IP address 192.168.1.212: 52. 2. Switch on the measuring device. 3. Connect to the computer using a cable 77. 4. If a 2nd network card is not used, close all the applications on the notebook.
Applications requiring Internet or a network, such as e-mail, SAP applications, Internet or Windows Explorer.
5. Close any open Internet browsers. 6. Configure the properties of the Internet protocol (TCP/IP) as defined in the table:
IP address
Subnet mask Default gateway
192.168.1.XXX; for XXX all numerical sequences except: 0, 212 and 255 e.g. 192.168.1.213
255.255.255.0
192.168.1.212 or leave cells empty
Via WLAN interface Configuring the Internet protocol of the mobile terminal NOTICE If the WLAN connection is lost during the configuration, settings made may be lost.
Make sure that the WLAN connection is not disconnected while configuring the device.
NOTICE In principle, avoid simultaneous access to the measuring device via the service interface (CDI-RJ45) and the WLAN interface from the same mobile terminal. This could cause a network conflict.
Only activate one service interface (CDI-RJ45 service interface or WLAN interface). If simultaneous communication is necessary: configure different IP address ranges, e.g.
192.168.0.1 (WLAN interface) and 192.168.1.212 (CDI-RJ45 service interface).
Preparing the mobile terminal
Enable WLAN reception on the mobile terminal.
Endress+Hauser
71
Operation options
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Establishing a connection from the mobile terminal to the measuring device 1. In the WLAN settings of the mobile terminal:
Select the measuring device using the SSID (e.g. EH_Promag_300_A802000). 2. If necessary, select the WPA2 encryption method. 3. Enter the password: serial number of the measuring device ex-works (e.g.
L100A802000). LED on display module flashes: it is now possible to operate the measuring device
with the Web browser, FieldCare or DeviceCare. The serial number can be found on the nameplate.
To ensure the safe and swift assignment of the WLAN network to the measuring point, it is advisable to change the SSID name. It should be possible to clearly assign the new SSID name to the measuring point (e.g. tag name) because it is displayed as the WLAN network. Disconnecting
After configuring the device:
Terminate the WLAN connection between the operating unit and measuring device.
Starting the Web browser 1. Start the Web browser on the computer.
72
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Operation options
2. Enter the IP address of the Web server in the address line of the Web browser: 192.168.1.212 The login page appears.
1
234
5
6
7
8
9
10
1 Picture of device 2 Device name 3 Device tag 4 Status signal 5 Current measured values 6 Operating language 7 User role 8 Access code 9 Login 10 Reset access code ( 127)
If a login page does not appear, or if the page is incomplete 144
A0029417
8.4.4 Logging on
1. Select the preferred operating language for the Web browser. 2. Enter the user-specific access code. 3. Press OK to confirm your entry.
Access code
0000 (factory setting); can be changed by customer
If no action is performed for 10 minutes, the Web browser automatically returns to the login page.
Endress+Hauser
73
Operation options
8.4.5 User interface
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
1 2
1 Function row 2 Local display language 3 Navigation area
3
A0029418
Header The following information appears in the header: � Device name � Device tag � Device status with status signal 150 � Current measured values
Function row
Functions
Meaning
Measured values Displays the measured values of the measuring device
Menu
� Access to the operating menu from the measuring device � The structure of the operating menu is the same as for the local display
For detailed information on the structure of the operating menu, see the Operating Instructions for the measuring device
Device status
Displays the diagnostic messages currently pending, listed in order of priority
Data management
Data exchange between PC and measuring device: � Device configuration:
� Load settings from the device (XML format, save configuration)
� Save settings to the device (XML format, restore configuration)
� Logbook - Export Event logbook (.csv file) � Documents - Export documents:
� Export backup data record (.csv file, create documentation of the measuring point configuration)
� Verification report (PDF file, only available with the "Heartbeat Verification" application package)
� File for system integration - If using fieldbuses, upload device drivers for system integration from the measuring device: EtherNet/IP: EDS file
� Firmware update - Flashing a firmware version
Network configuration
Configuration and checking of all the parameters required for establishing the connection to the measuring device: � Network settings (e.g. IP address, MAC address) � Device information (e.g. serial number, firmware version)
Logout
End the operation and call up the login page
74
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Operation options
Parameter Web server functionality
Navigation area If a function is selected in the function bar, the submenus of the function open in the navigation area. The user can now navigate through the menu structure.
Working area Depending on the selected function and the related submenus, various actions can be performed in this area: � Configuring parameters � Reading measured values � Calling up help text � Starting an upload/download
8.4.6 Disabling the Web server
The Web server of the measuring device can be switched on and off as required using the Web server functionality parameter. Navigation "Expert" menu Communication Web server
Parameter overview with brief description
Description Switch the Web server on and off.
Selection
� Off � HTML Off � On
Factory setting On
Function scope of the "Web server functionality" parameter
Option Off
On
Description
� The web server is completely disabled. � Port 80 is locked.
� The complete functionality of the web server is available. � JavaScript is used. � The password is transferred in an encrypted state. � Any change to the password is also transferred in an encrypted state.
Enabling the Web server If the Web server is disabled it can only be re-enabled with the Web server functionality parameter via the following operating options: � Via local display � Via Bedientool "FieldCare" � Via "DeviceCare" operating tool
8.4.7 Logging out
Before logging out, perform a data backup via the Data management function (upload configuration from device) if necessary.
1. Select the Logout entry in the function row. The home page with the Login box appears.
2. Close the Web browser.
Endress+Hauser
75
Operation options
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
3. If no longer needed: Reset modified properties of the Internet protocol (TCP/IP) 71.
If communication with the Web server was established via the default IP address 192.168.1.212, DIP switch No. 10 must be reset (from ON OFF). Afterwards, the IP address of the device is active again for network communication.
8.5 Access to the operating menu via the operating tool
The structure of the operating menu in the operating tools is the same as for operation via the local display.
8.5.1 Connecting the operating tool
Via EtherNet/IP network This communication interface is available in device versions with EtherNet/IP. Star topology
1
2
3
4
5
5
5
23 Options for remote operation via EtherNet/IP network: star topology
A0032078
1 Automation system, e.g. "RSLogix" (Rockwell Automation) 2 Workstation for measuring device operation: with Custom Add-On Profile for "RSLogix 5000" (Rockwell
Automation) or with Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) 3 Computer with Web browser (e.g. Internet Explorer) for accessing the integrated device Web server or
computer with operating tool (e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare) with COM DTM "CDI Communication TCP/IP" 4 Ethernet switch 5 Measuring device
Ring topology The device is integrated via the terminal connection for signal transmission (output 1) and the service interface (CDI-RJ45).
76
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
1
Operation options
2
3
4
5
5
5
24 Options for remote operation via EtherNet/IP network: ring topology
A0033725
1 Automation system, e.g. "RSLogix" (Rockwell Automation) 2 Workstation for measuring device operation: with Custom Add-On Profile for "RSLogix 5000" (Rockwell
Automation) or with Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) 3 Computer with Web browser (e.g. Internet Explorer) for accessing the integrated device Web server or
computer with operating tool (e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare) with COM DTM "CDI Communication TCP/IP" 4 Ethernet switch 5 Measuring device
Service interface Via service interface (CDI-RJ45) A point-to-point connection can be established to configure the device onsite. With the housing open, the connection is established directly via the service interface (CDI-RJ45) of the device.
An adapter for RJ45 and the M12 connector is optionally available: Order code for "Accessories", option NB: "Adapter RJ45 M12 (service interface)" The adapter connects the service interface (CDI-RJ45) to an M12 connector mounted in the cable entry. Therefore the connection to the service interface can be established via an M12 connector without opening the device.
1 3
2
25 Connection via service interface (CDI-RJ45)
A0027563
1 Computer with Web browser (e.g. Microsoft Internet Explorer, Microsoft Edge) for accessing the integrated device Web server or with "FieldCare", "DeviceCare" operating tool with COM DTM "CDI Communication TCP/IP"
2 Standard Ethernet connecting cable with RJ45 connector 3 Service interface (CDI-RJ45) of the measuring device with access to the integrated Web server
Endress+Hauser
77
Operation options
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Via WLAN interface The optional WLAN interface is available on the following device version: Order code for "Display; operation", option G "4-line, illuminated; touch control + WLAN"
34
1
2
34
5
6
7
A0034570
1 Transmitter with integrated WLAN antenna 2 Transmitter with external WLAN antenna 3 LED lit constantly: WLAN reception is enabled on measuring device 4 LED flashing: WLAN connection established between operating unit and measuring device 5 Computer with WLAN interface and Web browser (e.g. Microsoft Internet Explorer, Microsoft Edge) for
accessing the integrated device Web server or with operating tool (e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare) 6 Mobile handheld terminal with WLAN interface and Web browser (e.g. Microsoft Internet Explorer, Microsoft
Edge) for accessing the integrated device Web server or operating tool (e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare) 7 Smart phone or tablet (e.g. Field Xpert SMT70)
Function
Encryption Configurable WLAN channels Degree of protection Available antennas
Range Materials (external antenna)
WLAN: IEEE 802.11 b/g (2.4 GHz) � Access point with DHCP server (default setting) � Network
WPA2-PSK AES-128 (in accordance with IEEE 802.11i)
1 to 11
IP67
� Internal antenna � External antenna (optional)
In the event of poor transmission/reception conditions at the place of installation.
Only one antenna active in each case!
� Internal antenna: typically 10 m (32 ft) � External antenna: typically 50 m (164 ft)
� Antenna: ASA plastic (acrylic ester-styrene-acrylonitrile) and nickelplated brass
� Adapter: Stainless steel and nickel-plated brass � Cable: Polyethylene � Connector: Nickel-plated brass � Angle bracket: Stainless steel
Configuring the Internet protocol of the mobile terminal
NOTICE If the WLAN connection is lost during the configuration, settings made may be lost.
Make sure that the WLAN connection is not disconnected while configuring the device.
78
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Operation options
Endress+Hauser
NOTICE In principle, avoid simultaneous access to the measuring device via the service interface (CDI-RJ45) and the WLAN interface from the same mobile terminal. This could cause a network conflict.
Only activate one service interface (CDI-RJ45 service interface or WLAN interface). If simultaneous communication is necessary: configure different IP address ranges, e.g.
192.168.0.1 (WLAN interface) and 192.168.1.212 (CDI-RJ45 service interface).
Preparing the mobile terminal
Enable WLAN reception on the mobile terminal.
Establishing a connection from the mobile terminal to the measuring device 1. In the WLAN settings of the mobile terminal:
Select the measuring device using the SSID (e.g. EH_Promag_300_A802000). 2. If necessary, select the WPA2 encryption method. 3. Enter the password: serial number of the measuring device ex-works (e.g.
L100A802000). LED on display module flashes: it is now possible to operate the measuring device
with the Web browser, FieldCare or DeviceCare.
The serial number can be found on the nameplate.
To ensure the safe and swift assignment of the WLAN network to the measuring point, it is advisable to change the SSID name. It should be possible to clearly assign the new SSID name to the measuring point (e.g. tag name) because it is displayed as the WLAN network.
Disconnecting
After configuring the device:
Terminate the WLAN connection between the operating unit and measuring device.
8.5.2 FieldCare
Function scope FDT-based plant asset management tool from Endress+Hauser. It can configure all smart field devices in a system and helps you manage them. By using the status information, it is also a simple but effective way of checking their status and condition. Access is via: � CDI-RJ45 service interface 77 � WLAN interface 78 Typical functions: � Configuring parameters of transmitters � Loading and saving device data (upload/download) � Documentation of the measuring point � Visualization of the measured value memory (line recorder) and event logbook
For additional information about FieldCare, see Operating Instructions BA00027S and BA00059S
Source for device description files See information 82
Establishing a connection 1. Start FieldCare and launch the project.
79
Operation options 80
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
2. In the network: Add a device. The Add device window opens.
3. Select the CDI Communication TCP/IP option from the list and press OK to confirm. 4. Right-click CDI Communication TCP/IP and select the Add device option in the
context menu that opens. 5. Select the desired device from the list and press OK to confirm.
The CDI Communication TCP/IP (Configuration) window opens. 6. Enter the device address in the IP address field: 192.168.1.212 and press Enter to
confirm. 7. Establish the online connection to the device.
For additional information, see Operating Instructions BA00027S and BA00059S
User interface
23
45
67
Xxxxxx/.../.../
Device name:
1
Device tag:
Status:
Xxxxxxx Xxxxxxx Good
Mass flow: Volume flow:
12.34 kg/h 12.34 m�/h
Xxxxxx
P Access status tooling
+
Operation
�
Setup
P Device tag
�
System units
8
P Mass flow unit
P Volume flow unit
+
Select medium
+
...
+
...
+
Advanced setup
+
Diagnostics
+
Expert
Maintenance
Xxxxxx kg/h m�/h
Mass flow unit: Volume flow unit:
kg/h m�/h
9
10 11
1 Header 2 Picture of device 3 Device name 4 Device tag 5 Status area with status signal 150 6 Display area for current measured values 7 Edit toolbar with additional functions such as save/restore, event list and create documentation 8 Navigation area with operating menu structure 9 Working area 10 Range of action 11 Status area
8.5.3 DeviceCare
Function scope Tool to connect and configure Endress+Hauser field devices.
A0021051-EN
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Operation options
The fastest way to configure Endress+Hauser field devices is with the dedicated "DeviceCare" tool. Together with the device type managers (DTMs) it presents a convenient, comprehensive solution.
For details, see Innovation Brochure IN01047S
Source for device description files See information 82
Endress+Hauser
81
System integration 82
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
9
System integration
9.1 Overview of device description files
9.1.1 Current version data for the device
Firmware version
01.00.zz
� On the title page of the Operating Instructions � On the transmitter nameplate � Firmware version
Diagnostics Device information Firmware version
Release date of firmware version 10.2017
---
Manufacturer ID
0x11
Manufacturer ID Diagnostics Device information Manufacturer ID
Device type ID
0x103C
Device type Diagnostics Device information Device type
Device revision
� Major revision 1 � Minor revision 1
� On the transmitter nameplate � Device revision
Diagnostics Device information Device revision
Device profile
Generic device (product type: 0x2B)
For an overview of the different firmware versions for the device 171
9.1.2 Operating tools
The suitable device description file for the individual operating tools is listed in the table below, along with information on where the file can be acquired.
Operating tool via Service interface (CDI) FieldCare
DeviceCare
Sources for obtaining device descriptions
� www.endress.com Download Area � CD�ROM (contact Endress+Hauser) � DVD (contact Endress+Hauser)
� www.endress.com Download Area � CD�ROM (contact Endress+Hauser) � DVD (contact Endress+Hauser)
9.2 Overview of system files
System files
Electronic Data Sheet (EDS system file)
Version 2.1
Add-on Profile Level 3
� Major revision 1
� Minor revision 1
Description
How to acquire
Certified in accordance with the following ODVA guidelines: � Conformance test � Performance test � PlugFest
Embedded EDS Support (File Object 0x37)
� www.endress.com DownloadArea
� EDS system file integrated in the device: can be downloaded via the Web browser
System file for "Studio 5000" software (Rockwell Automation)
www.endress.com DownloadArea
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
System integration
9.3 Integrating the measuring device in the system
A detailed description of how to integrate the device into an automation system (e.g. from Rockwell Automation) is available as a separate document: www.endress.com Select country Automation Digital communication Fieldbus device integration EtherNet/IP Protocol-specific data 188.
9.4 Cyclic data transmission
Cyclic data transmission when using the EDS system file.
9.4.1 Block model
The block model shows which input and output data the measuring device makes available for implicit messaging. Cyclical data exchange is performed using an EtherNet/IP scanner, e.g. a distributed control system etc.
Transducer Block
Measuring device
Input Assembly Fix (Assem100) 40 byte
85
Volume flow fixed input assembly (Assem106) 38 byte
86
Mass flow fixed input assembly (Assem107) 56 byte
86
Heartbeat monitoring fixed input assembly 1) (Assem112) 50 byte
86
Input assembly custom (Assem101) 88 byte
86
Output assembly fix (Assem102) 54 byte
87
Config assembly (Assem104) 1512 byte
88
Permanently assigned input group Permanently assigned input group
Permanently assigned input group
Permanently assigned input group
Configurable input group Permanently assigned output group Permanently assigned configuration
Control system
EtherNet/IP
1) Only available with the Heartbeat Verification application package.
Endress+Hauser
83
System integration
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
9.4.2 Input and output groups
Possible configurations
Configuration 1: Exclusive Owner Multicast
Input Assembly Fix Input Assembly Configurable Output Assembly Fix Input Assembly Fix
Configuration O T Configuration T O Configuration
Instance 0 x 64 0 x 66 0 x 64
Configuration 2: Input Only Multicast
Input Assembly Fix Input Assembly Configurable Output Assembly Fix Input Assembly Fix
Configuration O T Configuration T O Configuration
Instance 0 x 68 0 x C7 0 x 64
Configuration 3: Exclusive Owner Multicast
Input Assembly Configurable Input Assembly Configurable Output Assembly Fix Input Assembly Fix
Configuration O T Configuration T O Configuration
Instance 0 x 68 0 x 66 0 x 65
Configuration 4: Input Only Multicast
Input Assembly Configurable Input Assembly Configurable Output Assembly Fix Input Assembly Fix
Configuration O T Configuration T O Configuration
Instance 0 x 68 0 x C7 0 x 64
Configuration 5: Exclusive Owner Multicast
Input Assembly Fix Input Assembly Configurable Output Assembly Fix Input Assembly Fix
Configuration O T Configuration T O Configuration
Instance 0 x 69 0 x 66 0 x 64
Configuration 6: Input Only Multicast
Input Assembly Fix Input Assembly Configurable Output Assembly Fix Input Assembly Fix
Configuration O T Configuration T O Configuration
Instance 0 x 69 0 x C7 0 x 65
Size (byte) 398 64 44
Min. RPI (ms) � 5 5
Size (byte) 398 � 44
Min. RPI (ms) � � 5
Size (byte) 398 64 88
Min. RPI (ms) � 5 5
Size (byte) 398 � 88
Min. RPI (ms) � � 5
Size (byte) � 64 44
Min. RPI (ms) � 5 5
Size (byte) � � 44
Min. RPI (ms) � � 5
84
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
System integration
Configuration 7: Exclusive Owner Multicast
Input Assembly Configurable Input Assembly Configurable Output Assembly Fix Input Assembly Fix
Configuration O T Configuration T O Configuration
Instance 0 x 69 0 x 66 0 x 64
Size (byte) � 64 88
Min. RPI (ms) � 5 5
Configuration 8: Input Only Multicast
Input Assembly Configurable Input Assembly Configurable Output Assembly Fix Input Assembly Fix
Configuration O T Configuration T O Configuration
Instance 0 x 69 0 x C7 0 x 65
Size (byte) � � 88
Min. RPI (ms) � � 5
Possible connections
No.
#1
#2
#3
#4
#5
Number of connections
1
1
1
1
1
Input assembly fixed
X
(Assem100)
Volume flow fixed input
X
assembly (Assem106)
Mass flow fixed input
X
assembly (Assem107)
Input assembly custom
X
(Assem101)
Heartbeat monitoring fixed
X
input assembly (Assem112)
Permanently assigned input group
Input assembly fixed (Assem100), 40 byte
Description 1. File header (not visible) 2. Current diagnosis 1) 3. Volume flow 4. Mass flow 5. Corrected volume flow 6. Conductivity 7. Temperature 8. Totalizer 1 9. Totalizer 2 10. Totalizer 3
1) Diagnostic information via EtherNet/IP 90
Byte 1-4 5-8 9-12 13-16 17-20 21-24 25-28 29-32 33-36 37-40
Endress+Hauser
85
System integration 86
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Volume flow fixed input assembly (Assem106), 40 byte
Description 1. File header (not visible) 2. Current diagnosis 1) 3. Volume flow 4. Corrected volume flow 5. Conductivity 6. Temperature 7. Totalizer 1 8. Volume flow unit 9. Corrected volume flow unit
10. Conductivity unit 11. Temperature unit 12. Totalizer 1 unit 13. Padding byte
1) Diagnostic information via EtherNet/IP 90
Mass flow fixed input assembly (Assem107), 58 byte
Description 1. Volume flow fixed input assembly 2. Mass flow 3. Totalizer 2 4. Totalizer 3 5. Mass flow unit 6. Totalizer 2 unit 7. Totalizer 3 unit
Byte 1-4 5-8 9-12 13-16 17-20 21-24 25-28 29-30 31-32 33-34 35-36 37-38 39-40
Byte 1-40 41-44 45-48 49-52 53-54 55-56 57-58
Heartbeat monitoring fixed input assembly (Assem112), 56 byte 1)
Description 1. Volume flow fixed input assembly 2. Noise 3. Coil current shot time 4. Reference electrode potential against PE 5. Verification status 6. Verification result
1) Only available with the Heartbeat Verification application package.
Configurable input group
Input assembly custom (Assem101), 88 byte
Description 1. - 10. Input values 1 to 10
11. - 20. Input values 11 to 20
Byte 1-40 41-44 45-48 49-52 53-54 55-56
Format Real Double integer
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
System integration
Possible input values
Possible input values 1 to 10:
� Off � Volume flow � Mass flow � Corrected volume flow
� Flow velocity � Conductivity � Corrected conductivity � Temperature
� Electronic temperature � Totalizer 1 � Totalizer 2 � Totalizer 3
Possible input values 11 to 20:
� Off � Actual diagnostics � Previous diagnostics � Mass flow unit � Volume flow unit � Corrected volume flow unit
� Temperature unit � Conductivity unit � Totalizer 1 unit � Totalizer 2 unit � Totalizer 3 unit
� Verification results 1) � Verification status
1) Only available with the Heartbeat Verification application package.
Permanently assigned output group
Output assembly fix (Assem102), 30 byte
Description (format) 1. Totalizer 1 2. Totalizer 2 3. Totalizer 3 4. External density 5. Compensation, temperature 6. Verification 7. Flow override 8. Not used 9. Not used
10. Not used 11. Control totalizer 1 (integer) 12. Control totalizer 2 (integer) 13. Control totalizer 3 (integer)
Byte 1
2 3-4 5-6 7-8 9-10
14. Not used 15. External density (real)
11-12 13-16
Bit
Value
0
1
2
3 � 0: Disable 4 � 1: Enable
5
6
7
8�
16 �
16 � -32226 (0): Add
16
� -32490 (1): Reset and stop � -32228 (2): Default value and stop
16 � 198 (3): Reset and add � 199 (4): Default value and add
� 32928 (3): Stop
16 �
32 Data format: Byte 1 to 4: External density Floating-point number (IEEE754)
Endress+Hauser
87
System integration
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Description (format) 16. External density unit (integer)
17. Not used 18. External temperature (real) 19. External temperature unit (integer) 20. Start verification (integer) 21. Flow override monitoring
Byte 17-18
19-20 21-24 25-26 27-28 29-30
Bit
Value
16 � 1100 (91) : g/cm3 � 1101 (204) : g/m3 � 1103 (96) : kg/l � 1099 (240) : kg/dm3 � 1097 (92) : kg/m3 � 1628 (240) : SD4�C � 1629 (240) : SD15�C � 1630 (240) : SD20�C � 32833 (240) : SG4�C � 32832 (240) : SG15�C � 32831 (240) : SG20�C � 1107 (94) : lb/ft3 � 1108 (93) : lb/gal (us) � 32836 (240) : lb/bbl (us;liq.) � 32835 (240) : lb/bbl (us;beer) � 32837 (240) : lb/bbl (us;oil) � 32834 (240) : lb/bbl (us;tank) � 1430 (240) : lb/gal (imp) � 32838 (240) : lb/bbl (imp;beer) � 32839 (240) : lb/bbl (imp;oil)
16 �
32 Data format: Byte 1 to 4: External temperature Floating-point number (IEEE754)
16 � 1001 (32): �C � 1002 (33): �F � 1000 (35): K � 1003 (34): �R
16 � 32823 (0): Cancel � 33158 (1): Start
16 � 33004 (0): Off � 33006 (1): On
Permanently assigned configuration group
Config assembly (Assem104), 1512 byte
Description (format)
1.
None
2.
Parameter 28
3.
None
4.
Parameter 74
5.
Parameter 73
6.
Parameter 77
7.
Parameter 76
8.
Parameter 71
9.
Parameter 72
10. Parameter 75
11. Parameter 69
12. None
13. Parameter 147
14. Parameter 78
15. Parameter 90
16. Parameter 87
�
System units System units System units System units System units System units System units System units
� Totalizer 1 Totalizer 1 Totalizer 1
Write protection
Mass flow unit Mass unit Volume flow unit Volume unit Corrected volume flow unit Density unit Temperature unit Conductivity unit
Enter access code Assign process variable Unit totalizer Totalizer operation mode
Bits
Byte
Offset
32
4
0
8
4
4
8
4
5
16
4
6
16
4
8
16
4
10
16
4
12
16
4
14
16
4
16
16
4
18
16
4
20
192
4
22
16
4
46
16
4
48
16
4
50
16
4
52
88
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Description (format) 17. Parameter 84 18. Parameter 149 19. Parameter 81 20. Parameter 79 21. Parameter 91 22. Parameter 88 23. Parameter 85 24. Parameter 82 25. Parameter 150 26. Parameter 80 27. Parameter 92 28. Parameter 89 29. Parameter 86 30. Parameter 130 31. Parameter 83 32. Parameter 8 33. Parameter 19 34. Parameter 21 35. Parameter 22 36. Parameter 23 37. Parameter 24 38. Parameter 25 39. Parameter 26 40. Parameter 27 41. Parameter 9 42. Parameter 10 43. Parameter 11 44. Parameter 12 45. Parameter 13 46. Parameter 14 47. Parameter 15 48. Parameter 16 49. Parameter 17 50. Parameter 18 51. Parameter 20 52. Parameter 30 53. Parameter 29 54. Parameter 31 55. Parameter 110 56. Parameter 109 57. Parameter 118 58. Parameter 111 59. Parameter 106
Endress+Hauser
Totalizer 1 Totalizer operation Totalizer operation Totalizer 2 Totalizer 2 Totalizer 2 Totalizer 2 Totalizer operation Totalizer operation Totalizer 3 Totalizer 3 Totalizer 3 Totalizer 3 Totalizer operation Totalizer operation Configurable input assembly Configurable input assembly Configurable input assembly Configurable input assembly Configurable input assembly Configurable input assembly Configurable input assembly Configurable input assembly Configurable input assembly Configurable input assembly Configurable input assembly Configurable input assembly Configurable input assembly Configurable input assembly Configurable input assembly Configurable input assembly Configurable input assembly Configurable input assembly Configurable input assembly Configurable input assembly Sensor adjustment Low flow cut off Empty pipe detection Low flow cut off Low flow cut off Low flow cut off Empty pipe detection Process parameter
System integration
Bits
Failure mode
16
Preset value tot. 1
32
Control totalizer 1
16
Assign process variable
16
Unit totalizer
16
Totalizer operation mode
16
Failure mode
16
Control totalizer 2
16
Preset value tot. 2
32
Assign process variable
16
Unit totalizer
16
Totalizer operation mode
16
Failure mode
16
Preset value tot. 3
32
Control totalizer 3
16
Input assembly position 1
16
Input assembly position 2
16
Input assembly position 3
16
Input assembly position 4
16
Input assembly position 5
16
Input assembly position 6
16
Input assembly position 7
16
Input assembly position 8
16
Input assembly position 9
16
Input assembly position 10
16
Input assembly position 11
16
Input assembly position 12
16
Input assembly position 13
16
Input assembly position 14
16
Input assembly position 15
16
Input assembly position 16
16
Input assembly position 17
16
Input assembly position 18
16
Input assembly position 19
16
Input assembly position 20
16
Flow direction
16
Assign process variable
16
Assign process variable
16
On value low flow cut off
32
Off value low flow cutoff
32
Pressure shock suppression
32
Response time part. filled pipe detect.
32
Conductivity damping
32
Byte 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Offset 54 56 60 62 64 66 68 70 72 76 78 80 82 84 88 90 92 94 96 98 100 102 104 106 108 110 112 114 116 118 120 122 124 126 128 130 132 134 136 140 144 148 152
89
System integration
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Description (format) 60. Parameter 32 61. Parameter 45 62. Parameter 42 63. Parameter 49 64. Parameter 138 65. Parameter 140 66. Parameter 48 67. Parameter 141 68. None 69. Parameter 146 70. Parameter 53
71. Parameter 54
72. Parameter 55
73. Parameter 56
74. Parameter 57
75. Parameter 52
76. Parameter 58
77. Parameter 51
Process parameter Empty pipe detection External compensation External compensation Empty pipe detection External compensation Process parameter Process parameter
Diagnostic settings Diagnostic behavior
Diagnostic behavior
Diagnostic behavior
Diagnostic behavior
Diagnostic behavior
Diagnostic behavior
Diagnostic behavior
Diagnostic behavior
Flow override
New adjustment
Density source
Temperature source
Switch point empty pipe detection
Fixed density
Filter options
Flow damping
Alarm delay
Assign behavior for diagnostic information 832
Assign behavior for diagnostic information 833
Assign behavior for diagnostic information 834
Assign behavior for diagnostic information 835
Assign behavior for diagnostic information 962
Assign behavior for diagnostic information 531
Assign behavior for diagnostic information 937
Assign behavior for diagnostic information 302
Bits
Byte
Offset
16
4
156
16
4
158
16
4
160
16
4
162
32
4
164
32
4
168
16
4
172
8
4
174
8
4
175
32
4
176
8
4
180
8
4
181
8
4
182
8
4
183
8
4
184
8
4
185
8
4
186
8
4
187
9.5 Diagnostic information via EtherNet/IP
Status signal
F F F F F F F F F F F F F F
No.
Short text
000
�
882
Input signal
281
Electronic initialization
437
Configuration incompatible
242
Software incompatible
252
Modules incompatible
272
Main electronic failure
270
Main electronic failure
271
Main electronic failure
270
Main electronic failure
270
Main electronic failure
410
Data transfer
273
Main electronic failure
270
Main electronic failure
083
Memory content
Value 0
16777265 16777276 16777312 16777319 16777323 16777337 16777340 16777341 16777343 16777344 16777355 16777368 16777375 16777376
90
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Endress+Hauser
Status signal F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F C C C C C C C C C C C C C C M M
No.
Short text
833
Electronic temperature too low
832
Electronic temperature too high
834
Process temperature too high
835
Process temperature too low
022
Sensor temperature
022
Sensor temperature
311
Electronic failure
273
Main electronic failure
082
Data storage
190
Special event 1
273
Main electronic failure
390
Special event 2
222
Electronic drift
938
EMC interference
062
Sensor connection
590
Special event 3
990
Special event 4
262
Module connection
537
Configuration
201
Device failure
937
EMC interference
500
Electrode 1 potential exceeded
500
Electrode 2 potential exceeded
500
Electrode difference voltage too high
382
Data storage
383
Memory content
283
Memory content
411
Up-/download active
411
Up-/download active
411
Up-/download active
484
Simulation failure mode
485
Simulation measured variable
453
Flow override
833
Electronic temperature too low
832
Electronic temperature too high
834
Process temperature too high
835
Process temperature too low
937
EMC interference
530
Electrode cleaning is running
495
Simulation diagnostic event
302
Device verification active
438
Dataset
833
Electronic temperature too low
System integration
Value 16777409 16777411 16777413 16777414 16777429 16777430 16777441 16777445 16777447 16777450 16777483 16777490 16777497 16777499 16777500 16777508 16777509 16777545 16777546 16777547 16777556 16777563 16777564 16777565 16777581 16777582 16777583 33554536 33554537 33554540 33554576 33554579 33554580 33554625 33554627 33554629 33554630 33554772 33554778 33554782 33554926 67108970 67109057
91
System integration
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Status signal M M M M M S S S S S S S S S S S S
No.
Short text
832
Electronic temperature too high
834
Process temperature too high
835
Process temperature too low
311
Electronic failure
937
EMC interference
842
Process limit
862
Empty pipe
833
Electronic temperature too low
832
Electronic temperature too high
834
Process temperature too high
835
Process temperature too low
004
Sensor
043
Sensor short circuit
937
EMC interference
322
Electronic drift
322
Electronic drift
531
Empty pipe detection
Value 67109059 67109061 67109062 67109090 67109204 134217873 134217874 134217921 134217923 134217925 134217926 134218013 134218067 134218068 134218071 134218072 134218091
92
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Commissioning
10 Commissioning
10.1 Function check
Before commissioning the measuring device:
Make sure that the post-installation and post-connection checks have been performed.
� "Post-installation check" checklist 35 � "Post-connection check" checklist 53
10.2 Switching on the measuring device
After a successful function check, switch on the measuring device.
After a successful startup, the local display switches automatically from the startup display to the operational display.
If nothing appears on the local display or a diagnostic message is displayed, refer to the section on "Diagnostics and troubleshooting" 143.
10.3 Connecting via FieldCare
� For FieldCare 77 connection � For connecting via FieldCare 79 � For the FieldCare 80 user interface
10.4 Setting the operating language
Factory setting: English or ordered local language
XXXXXXXXX
20.50
XX 1. 2. 3. 4.
XX Main menu
Display language
Operation Setup
0104-1 English
Display language � English
Deutsch Espa�ol Fran�ais
0104-1
Display language � English
Deutsch Espa�ol Fran�ais
0104-1
Hauptmen� Sprache
Betrieb Setup
0104-1 Deutsch
26 Taking the example of the local display
A0029420
Endress+Hauser
93
Commissioning 94
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
10.5 Configuring the measuring device
� The Setup menu with its guided wizards contains all the parameters needed for standard operation.
� Navigation to the Setup menu
XXXXXXXXX
20.50
mA
Main menu
0104-1
1.
Display language English
Display/operat.
Setup
Main menu
Display/operat.
2.
Setup
Diagnostic
/ ../Setup
3.
Medium selection
XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX
27 Taking the example of the local display
A0032222-EN
The number of submenus and parameters can vary depending on the device version. Certain submenus and parameters in these submenus are not described in the Operation Instructions. Instead a description is provided in the Special Documentation for the device ( "Supplementary documentation" section). Navigation "Setup" menu
Setup
Device tag
System units Communication I/O configuration Current input 1 to n Status input 1 to n Current output 1 to n Pulse/frequency/switch output
1 to n
95 95 97 98 99 100 101 103
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Commissioning
Relay output 1 to n Display Low flow cut off Empty pipe detection Advanced setup
109 110 113 114 115
10.5.1 Defining the tag name
To enable fast identification of the measuring point within the system, you can enter a unique designation using the Device tag parameter and thus change the factory setting.
1
XXXXXXXXX
Parameter Device tag
Endress+Hauser
28 Header of the operational display with tag name 1 Tag name
A0029422
Enter the tag name in the "FieldCare" operating tool 80 Navigation "Setup" menu Device tag
Parameter overview with brief description
Description Enter the name for the measuring point.
User entry
Max. 32 characters, such as letters, numbers or special characters (e.g. @, %, /).
Factory setting Promag
10.5.2 Setting the system units
In the System units submenu the units of all the measured values can be set. The number of submenus and parameters can vary depending on the device version. Certain submenus and parameters in these submenus are not described in the Operation Instructions. Instead a description is provided in the Special Documentation for the device ( "Supplementary documentation" section).
Navigation "Setup" menu System units
System units
Volume flow unit
96
95
Commissioning
Parameter Volume flow unit Volume unit Temperature unit Mass flow unit Mass unit Density unit
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Volume unit Conductivity unit Temperature unit Mass flow unit Mass unit Density unit Corrected volume flow unit Corrected volume unit
Parameter overview with brief description
Description
Select volume flow unit.
Result
The selected unit applies for: � Output � Low flow cut off � Simulation process variable
Select volume unit.
Selection Unit choose list
Unit choose list
Select temperature unit.
Result
The selected unit applies for: � Temperature parameter � Maximum value parameter � Minimum value parameter � External temperature parameter � Maximum value parameter � Minimum value parameter
Select mass flow unit.
Result
The selected unit applies for: � Output � Low flow cut off � Simulation process variable
Select mass unit.
Unit choose list Unit choose list Unit choose list
Select density unit.
Result
The selected unit applies for: � Output � Simulation process variable
Unit choose list
96
96 96 96 96
Factory setting Country-specific: � l/h � gal/min (us)
Country-specific: � m� � gal (us) Country-specific: � �C � �F
Country-specific: � kg/h � lb/min
Country-specific: � kg � lb Country-specific: � kg/l � lb/ft�
96
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Commissioning
10.5.3 Configuring the communication interface
The Communication submenu guides you systematically through all the parameters that have to be configured for selecting and setting the communication interface.
Navigation "Setup" menu Communication
Communication
MAC address Default network settings DHCP client IP address Subnet mask Default gateway
97 97 97 97 98 98
Parameter MAC address Default network settings DHCP client
IP address
Parameter overview with brief description
Description
Displays the MAC address of the measuring device.
MAC = Media Access Control
User interface/Selection/ User entry
Unique 12-digit character string comprising letters and numbers, e.g.: 00:07:05:10:01:5F
Factory setting
Each measuring device is given an individual address.
Select whether to restore network settings. � Off � On
Select to activate/deactivate DHCP client functionality.
Result If the DHCP client functionality of the Web server is activated, the IP address, Subnet mask and Default gateway are set automatically.
� Identification is via the MAC address of the measuring device. � The IP address in the IP address parameter is ignored as long as the DHCP client parameter is active. This is also the case, in particular, if the DHCP server cannot be reached. The IP address in the parameter of the same name is only used if the DHCP client parameter is inactive.
� Off � On
IP address of the Web server integrated in the measuring device.
If the DHCP client is switched off and write access is enabled, the IP address can also be entered.
4 octet: 0 to 255 (in the particular octet)
Off Off
192.168.1.212
Endress+Hauser
97
Commissioning
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Parameter Subnet mask
Default gateway
Description
Displays the subnet mask. If the DHCP client is switched off and write access is enabled, the Subnet mask can also be entered.
Displays the default gateway. If the DHCP client is switched off and write access is enabled, the Default gateway can also be entered.
User interface/Selection/ User entry
4 octet: 0 to 255 (in the particular octet)
4 octet: 0 to 255 (in the particular octet)
Factory setting 255.255.255.0
0.0.0.0
10.5.4 Displaying the I/O configuration
The I/O configuration submenu guides the user systematically through all the parameters in which the configuration of the I/O modules is displayed.
Navigation "Setup" menu I/O configuration
I/O configuration
I/O module 1 to n terminal numbers I/O module 1 to n information I/O module 1 to n type Apply I/O configuration Alteration code
98 98 98 99 99
Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter
Description
User interface/Selection/ User entry
I/O module 1 to n terminal numbers Shows the terminal numbers used by the I/O � Not used
�
module.
� 26-27 (I/O 1)
� 24-25 (I/O 2)
� 22-23 (I/O 3)
I/O module 1 to n information
Shows information of the plugged I/O
� Not plugged
�
module.
� Invalid
� Not configurable
� Configurable
� EtherNet/IP
I/O module 1 to n type
Shows the I/O module type.
� Off
Off
� Current output
� Current input
� Status input
� Pulse/frequency/switch
output
� Double pulse output
� Relay output
Factory setting
98
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Commissioning
Parameter Apply I/O configuration Alteration code
Parameter Terminal number Signal mode 0/4 mA value 20 mA value Current span
Description
Apply parameterization of the freely configurable I/O module. Enter the code in order to change the I/O configuration.
User interface/Selection/ User entry
� No
No
� Yes
Positive integer
0
Factory setting
10.5.5 Configuring the current input
The "Current input" wizard guides the user systematically through all the parameters that have to be set for configuring the current input.
Navigation "Setup" menu Current input
Current input 1 to n
Terminal number Signal mode 0/4 mA value 20 mA value Current span Failure mode Failure value
99 99 99 99 99 100 100
Parameter overview with brief description
Prerequisite
�
The measuring device is not approved for use in the hazardous area with type of protection Ex-i. �
�
�
Description
Shows the terminal numbers used by the current input module. Select the signal mode for the current input.
User interface/ Selection/User
entry
� Not used � 24-25 (I/O 2) � 22-23 (I/O 3)
� Passive � Active
Factory setting � Active
Enter 4 mA value.
Enter 20 mA value.
Select current range for process value output and upper/lower level for alarm signal.
Signed floating-point 0 number
Signed floating-point Depends on country
number
and nominal
diameter
� 4...20 mA � 4...20 mA NAMUR � 4...20 mA US � 0...20 mA
Country-specific: � 4...20 mA NAMUR � 4...20 mA US
Endress+Hauser
99
Commissioning
Parameter Failure mode Failure value
Parameter Terminal number Assign status input Active level Response time status input
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Prerequisite
�
In the Failure mode parameter, the Defined value option is selected.
Description
User interface/ Selection/User
entry
Factory setting
Define input behavior in alarm � Alarm
condition.
� Last valid value
� Defined value
Alarm
Enter value to be used by the device if input value from external device is missing.
Signed floating-point 0 number
10.5.6 Configuring the status input
The Status input submenu guides the user systematically through all the parameters that have to be set for configuring the status input.
Navigation "Setup" menu Status input
Status input 1 to n
Assign status input Terminal number Active level Terminal number Response time status input Terminal number
100 100 100 100 100 100
Parameter overview with brief description
Description
User interface/Selection/ User entry
Shows the terminal numbers used by the status input module.
� Not used � 24-25 (I/O 2) � 22-23 (I/O 3)
Select function for the status input.
� Off � Reset totalizer 1 � Reset totalizer 2 � Reset totalizer 3 � Reset all totalizers � Flow override
Define input signal level at which the assigned function is triggered.
� High � Low
Define the minimum amount of time the
5 to 200 ms
input signal level must be present before the
selected function is triggered.
Factory setting � Off
High 50 ms
100
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Commissioning
10.5.7 Configuring the current output
The Current output wizard guides you systematically through all the parameters that have to be set for configuring the current output.
Navigation "Setup" menu Current output
Current output 1 to n
Terminal number Signal mode Assign current output 1 to n Current span 0/4 mA value 20 mA value Fixed current Damping output 1 to n Failure mode Failure current
101 101 101 101 102 102 102 102 102 102
Parameter Terminal number Signal mode Assign current output 1 to n
Current span
Parameter overview with brief description
Prerequisite � � �
�
Description
Shows the terminal numbers used by the current output module. Select the signal mode for the current output. Select process variable for current output.
Select current range for process value output and upper/lower level for alarm signal.
User interface/ Selection/User
entry
Factory setting
� Not used
�
� 24-25 (I/O 2)
� 22-23 (I/O 3)
� Passive � Active
Active
� Off � Volume flow � Mass flow � Corrected volume
flow � Flow velocity � Conductivity * � Electronic
temperature
Volume flow
� 4...20 mA NAMUR � 4...20 mA US � 4...20 mA � 0...20 mA � Fixed current
Country-specific: � 4...20 mA NAMUR � 4...20 mA US
Endress+Hauser
101
Commissioning
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Parameter 0/4 mA value 20 mA value Fixed current Damping output 1 to n
Failure mode
Failure current
Prerequisite
Description
In the Current span parameter Enter 4 mA value. ( 101), one of the following options is selected: � 4...20 mA NAMUR � 4...20 mA US � 4...20 mA � 0...20 mA
One of the following options is selected in the Current span parameter ( 101): � 4...20 mA NAMUR � 4...20 mA US � 4...20 mA � 0...20 mA
Enter 20 mA value.
The Fixed current option is selected in the Current span parameter ( 101).
Defines the fixed output current.
A process variable is selected in the Assign current output parameter ( 101) and one of the following options is selected in the Current span parameter ( 101): � 4...20 mA NAMUR � 4...20 mA US � 4...20 mA � 0...20 mA
Set reaction time for output signal to fluctuations in the measured value.
A process variable is selected in the Assign current output parameter ( 101) and one of the following options is selected in the Current span parameter ( 101): � 4...20 mA NAMUR � 4...20 mA US � 4...20 mA � 0...20 mA
Define output behavior in alarm condition.
The Defined value option is selected in the Failure mode parameter.
Enter current output value in alarm condition.
User interface/ Selection/User
entry
Factory setting
Signed floating-point Country-specific:
number
� 0 l/h
� 0 gal/min (us)
Signed floating-point Depends on country
number
and nominal
diameter
0 to 22.5 mA 0.0 to 999.9 s
22.5 mA 1.0 s
� Min. � Max. � Last valid value � Actual value � Defined value
Max.
0 to 22.5 mA
22.5 mA
* Visibility depends on order options or device settings
102
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Commissioning
10.5.8 Configuring the pulse/frequency/switch output
The Pulse/frequency/switch output wizard guides you systematically through all the parameters that can be set for configuring the selected output type.
Navigation "Setup" menu Advanced setup Pulse/frequency/switch output
Pulse/frequency/switch output
1 to n Operating mode
103
Parameter Operating mode
Parameter overview with brief description
Description
Define the output as a pulse, frequency or switch output.
Selection
� Pulse � Frequency � Switch
Configuring the pulse output Navigation "Setup" menu Pulse/frequency/switch output
Factory setting Pulse
Pulse/frequency/switch output
1 to n Operating mode Terminal number Signal mode Assign pulse output Value per pulse Pulse width Failure mode Invert output signal
104 104 104 104 104 104 104 104
Endress+Hauser
103
Commissioning
Parameter Operating mode Terminal number Signal mode Assign pulse output 1 to n Value per pulse Pulse width Failure mode Invert output signal
104
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Parameter overview with brief description
Prerequisite
Description
Selection/User interface/User
entry
�
Define the output as a pulse, � Pulse
frequency or switch output.
� Frequency
� Switch
�
Shows the terminal numbers � Not used
used by the PFS output
� 24-25 (I/O 2)
module.
� 22-23 (I/O 3)
�
Select the signal mode for the � Passive
PFS output.
� Active
The Pulse option is selected in Select process variable for
the Operating mode
pulse output.
parameter parameter.
� Off � Volume flow � Mass flow � Corrected volume
flow
The Pulse option is selected in the Operating mode parameter ( 103) and a process variable is selected in the Assign pulse output parameter ( 104).
Enter measured value at which Positive floating
a pulse is output.
point number
The Pulse option is selected in the Operating mode parameter ( 103) and a process variable is selected in the Assign pulse output parameter ( 104).
Define time width of the output pulse.
0.05 to 2 000 ms
The Pulse option is selected in the Operating mode parameter ( 103) and a process variable is selected in the Assign pulse output parameter ( 104).
Define output behavior in alarm condition.
� Actual value � No pulses
�
Invert the output signal.
� No
� Yes
Factory setting Pulse � Passive Off
Depends on country and nominal diameter 100 ms
No pulses
No
Configuring the frequency output Navigation "Setup" menu Pulse/frequency/switch output
Pulse/frequency/switch output
1 to n Operating mode Terminal number Signal mode Assign frequency output Minimum frequency value
105 105 105 105 105
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Commissioning
Maximum frequency value
Measuring value at minimum frequency
Measuring value at maximum frequency
Failure mode
Failure frequency
Invert output signal
105 105
106
106 106 106
Parameter Operating mode Terminal number Signal mode Assign frequency output
Minimum frequency value
Maximum frequency value
Measuring value at minimum frequency
Parameter overview with brief description
Prerequisite
�
�
�
The Frequency option is selected in the Operating mode parameter ( 103).
The Frequency option is selected in the Operating mode parameter ( 103) and a process variable is selected in the Assign frequency output parameter ( 105). The Frequency option is selected in the Operating mode parameter ( 103) and a process variable is selected in the Assign frequency output parameter ( 105). The Frequency option is selected in the Operating mode parameter ( 103) and a process variable is selected in the Assign frequency output parameter ( 105).
Description
Define the output as a pulse, frequency or switch output. Shows the terminal numbers used by the PFS output module. Select the signal mode for the PFS output. Select process variable for frequency output.
Enter minimum frequency.
Enter maximum frequency.
Enter measured value for minmum frequency.
Selection/User interface/User
entry
� Pulse � Frequency � Switch
� Not used � 24-25 (I/O 2) � 22-23 (I/O 3)
� Passive � Active
� Off � Volume flow � Mass flow � Corrected volume
flow � Flow velocity � Conductivity * � Electronic
temperature
0.0 to 10 000.0 Hz
Factory setting Pulse � Passive Off
0.0 Hz
0.0 to 10 000.0 Hz 10 000.0 Hz
Signed floating-point Depends on country
number
and nominal
diameter
Endress+Hauser
105
Commissioning
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Parameter Measuring value at maximum frequency
Failure mode
Failure frequency
Invert output signal
Prerequisite
The Frequency option is selected in the Operating mode parameter ( 103) and a process variable is selected in the Assign frequency output parameter ( 105).
The Frequency option is selected in the Operating mode parameter ( 103) and a process variable is selected in the Assign frequency output parameter ( 105).
The Frequency option is selected in the Operating mode parameter ( 103) and a process variable is selected in the Assign frequency output parameter ( 105).
�
Description Enter measured value for maximum frequency.
Define output behavior in alarm condition.
Enter frequency output value in alarm condition.
Invert the output signal.
Selection/User interface/User
entry
Factory setting
Signed floating-point Depends on country
number
and nominal
diameter
� Actual value
0 Hz
� Defined value
� 0 Hz
0.0 to 12 500.0 Hz 0.0 Hz
� No
No
� Yes
* Visibility depends on order options or device settings
106
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Commissioning
Configuring the switch output Navigation "Setup" menu Pulse/frequency/switch output
Pulse/frequency/switch output
1 to n Operating mode Terminal number Signal mode Switch output function Assign diagnostic behavior Assign limit Assign flow direction check Assign status Switch-on value Switch-off value Switch-on delay Switch-off delay Failure mode Invert output signal
107 107 107 108 108 108 108 108 108 108 108 109 109 109
Parameter Operating mode Terminal number Signal mode
Parameter overview with brief description
Prerequisite � � �
Description
Define the output as a pulse, frequency or switch output.
Shows the terminal numbers used by the PFS output module. Select the signal mode for the PFS output.
Selection/User interface/User
entry
� Pulse � Frequency � Switch
� Not used � 24-25 (I/O 2) � 22-23 (I/O 3)
� Passive � Active
Factory setting Pulse � Passive
Endress+Hauser
107
Commissioning
Parameter Switch output function Assign diagnostic behavior Assign limit
Assign flow direction check Assign status Switch-on value Switch-off value Switch-on delay
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Prerequisite
Description
Selection/User interface/User
entry
Factory setting
The Switch option is selected in the Operating mode parameter.
Select function for switch output.
� Off
Off
� On
� Diagnostic
behavior
� Limit
� Flow direction
check
� Status
� In the Operating mode parameter, the Switch option is selected.
� In the Switch output function parameter, the Diagnostic behavior option is selected.
Select diagnostic behavior for switch output.
� Alarm � Alarm or warning � Warning
Alarm
� The Switch option is selected in the Operating mode parameter.
� The Limit option is selected in the Switch output function parameter.
Select process variable for limit function.
� Off � Volume flow � Mass flow � Corrected volume
flow � Flow velocity � Conductivity * � Totalizer 1 � Totalizer 2 � Totalizer 3 � Electronic
temperature
Volume flow
� The Switch option is selected in the Operating mode parameter.
� The Flow direction check option is selected in the Switch output function parameter.
Select process variable for flow direction monitoring.
� Off � Volume flow � Mass flow � Corrected volume
flow
Volume flow
� The Switch option is selected in the Operating mode parameter.
� The Status option is selected in the Switch output function parameter.
Select device status for switch output.
� Empty pipe detection
� Low flow cut off
Empty pipe detection
� The Switch option is selected in the Operating mode parameter.
� The Limit option is selected in the Switch output function parameter.
Enter measured value for the switch-on point.
Signed floating-point Country-specific:
number
� 0 l/h
� 0 gal/min (us)
� The Switch option is selected in the Operating mode parameter.
� The Limit option is selected in the Switch output function parameter.
Enter measured value for the switch-off point.
Signed floating-point Country-specific:
number
� 0 l/h
� 0 gal/min (us)
� The Switch option is selected in the Operating mode parameter.
� The Limit option is selected in the Switch output function parameter.
Define delay for the switch-on of status output.
0.0 to 100.0 s
0.0 s
108
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Commissioning
Parameter Switch-off delay
Failure mode Invert output signal
Prerequisite
Description
Selection/User interface/User
entry
� The Switch option is selected in the Operating mode parameter.
� The Limit option is selected in the Switch output function parameter.
Define delay for the switch-off of status output.
0.0 to 100.0 s
�
Define output behavior in
� Actual status
alarm condition.
� Open
� Closed
�
Invert the output signal.
� No
� Yes
Factory setting 0.0 s
Open No
* Visibility depends on order options or device settings
10.5.9 Configuring the relay output
The Relay output wizard guides the user systematically through all the parameters that have to be set for configuring the relay output.
Navigation "Setup" menu Relay output 1 to n
RelaisOutput 1 to n
Switch output function Assign flow direction check Assign limit Assign diagnostic behavior Assign status Switch-off value Switch-on value Failure mode
110 110 110 110 110 110 110 110
Endress+Hauser
109
Commissioning
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter Relay output function
Terminal number Assign flow direction check Assign limit
Assign diagnostic behavior Assign status Switch-off value Switch-off delay Switch-on value Switch-on delay Failure mode
Prerequisite
Description
Selection/User interface/User
entry
Factory setting
�
Select the function for the
� Closed
Closed
relay output.
� Open
� Diagnostic
behavior
� Limit
� Flow direction
check
� Digital Output
�
Shows the terminal numbers � Not used
�
used by the relay output
� 24-25 (I/O 2)
module.
� 22-23 (I/O 3)
In the Relay output function parameter, the Flow direction check option is selected.
Select process variable for flow direction monitoring.
� Off � Volume flow � Mass flow � Corrected volume
flow
Volume flow
The Limit option is selected in the Relay output function parameter.
Select process variable for limit function.
� Off � Volume flow � Mass flow � Corrected volume
flow � Flow velocity � Conductivity * � Totalizer 1 � Totalizer 2 � Totalizer 3 � Electronic
temperature
Volume flow
In the Relay output function parameter, the Diagnostic behavior option is selected.
Select diagnostic behavior for switch output.
� Alarm � Alarm or warning � Warning
Alarm
In the Relay output function Select device status for switch parameter, the Digital Output output. option is selected.
� Partially filled pipe Partially filled pipe
detection
detection
� Low flow cut off
In the Relay output function parameter, the Limit option is selected.
Enter measured value for the switch-off point.
Signed floating-point Country-specific:
number
� 0 l/h
� 0 gal(us)/min
In the Relay output function parameter, the Limit option is selected.
Define delay for the switch-off of status output.
0.0 to 100.0 s
0.0 s
The Limit option is selected in the Relay output function parameter.
Enter measured value for the switch-on point.
Signed floating-point Country-specific:
number
� 0 l/h
� 0 gal(us)/min
In the Relay output function parameter, the Limit option is selected.
Define delay for the switch-on of status output.
0.0 to 100.0 s
0.0 s
�
Define output behavior in
� Actual status
Open
alarm condition.
� Open
� Closed
* Visibility depends on order options or device settings
10.5.10 Configuring the local display
The Display wizard guides you systematically through all the parameters that can configured for configuring the local display.
110
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Commissioning
Navigation "Setup" menu Display
Display
Format display Value 1 display 0% bargraph value 1 100% bargraph value 1 Value 2 display Value 3 display 0% bargraph value 3 100% bargraph value 3 Value 4 display
111 111 111 111 112 112 112 112 112
Parameter Format display Value 1 display
0% bargraph value 1 100% bargraph value 1
Parameter overview with brief description
Prerequisite A local display is provided. A local display is provided.
A local display is provided. A local display is provided.
Description
Selection/User entry
Factory setting
Select how measured values are shown on the display.
� 1 value, max. size � 1 bargraph + 1
value � 2 values � 1 value large + 2
values � 4 values
1 value, max. size
Select the measured value that is shown on the local display.
� Volume flow � Mass flow � Corrected volume
flow � Flow velocity � Totalizer 1 � Totalizer 2 � Totalizer 3 � Current output 1 � Current output 2 * � Current output 3 * � Electronic
temperature
Volume flow
Enter 0% value for bar graph display.
Signed floating-point Country-specific:
number
� 0 l/h
� 0 gal/min (us)
Enter 100% value for bar graph display.
Signed floating-point Depends on country
number
and nominal
diameter
Endress+Hauser
111
Commissioning
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Parameter Value 2 display
Prerequisite A local display is provided.
Value 3 display
A local display is provided.
0% bargraph value 3 100% bargraph value 3 Value 4 display
A selection was made in the Value 3 display parameter.
A selection was made in the Value 3 display parameter. A local display is provided.
* Visibility depends on order options or device settings
Description
Selection/User entry
Factory setting
Select the measured value that is shown on the local display.
� None � Volume flow � Mass flow � Corrected volume
flow � Flow velocity � Conductivity � Corrected
conductivity � Totalizer 1 � Totalizer 2 � Totalizer 3 � Current output 1 � Current output 2 * � Current output 3 * � Current output 4 * � Temperature � Electronic
temperature
None
Select the measured value that is shown on the local display.
� None � Volume flow � Mass flow � Corrected volume
flow � Flow velocity � Conductivity � Corrected
conductivity � Totalizer 1 � Totalizer 2 � Totalizer 3 � Current output 1 � Current output 2 * � Current output 3 * � Current output 4 * � Temperature � Electronic
temperature
None
Enter 0% value for bar graph display.
Signed floating-point Country-specific:
number
� 0 l/h
� 0 gal/min (us)
Enter 100% value for bar graph display.
Signed floating-point 0 number
Select the measured value that is shown on the local display.
� None � Volume flow � Mass flow � Corrected volume
flow � Flow velocity � Conductivity � Corrected
conductivity � Totalizer 1 � Totalizer 2 � Totalizer 3 � Current output 1 � Current output 2 * � Current output 3 * � Current output 4 * � Temperature � Electronic
temperature
None
112
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Commissioning
10.5.11 Configuring the low flow cut off
The Low flow cut off wizard systematically guides the user through all the parameters that must be set to configure low flow cut off.
Navigation "Setup" menu Low flow cut off
Low flow cut off
Assign process variable On value low flow cutoff Off value low flow cutoff Pressure shock suppression
113 113 113 113
Parameter Assign process variable
On value low flow cutoff Off value low flow cutoff Pressure shock suppression
Parameter overview with brief description
Prerequisite
Description
Selection/User entry
�
Select process variable for low � Off
flow cut off.
� Volume flow
� Mass flow
� Corrected volume
flow
A process variable is selected Enter on value for low flow cut Positive floating-
in the Assign process variable off.
point number
parameter ( 113).
A process variable is selected Enter off value for low flow cut 0 to 100.0 % in the Assign process variable off. parameter ( 113).
A process variable is selected Enter time frame for signal
in the Assign process variable suppression (= active pressure
parameter ( 113).
shock suppression).
0 to 100 s
Factory setting Volume flow
Depends on country and nominal diameter 50 %
0 s
Endress+Hauser
113
Commissioning
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
10.5.12 Configuring empty pipe detection
The Empty pipe detection submenu contains parameters that must be configured for the configuration of empty pipe detection.
Navigation "Setup" menu Empty pipe detection
Empty pipe detection
Empty pipe detection New adjustment Progress Switch point empty pipe detection Response time empty pipe detection
114 114 114 114 114
Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter
Prerequisite
Description
Selection/User interface/User
entry
Empty pipe detection
�
Switch empty pipe detection on � Off
and off.
� On
New adjustment
The On option is selected in the Empty pipe detection parameter.
Select type of adjustment.
� Cancel � Empty pipe adjust � Full pipe adjust
Progress
The On option is selected in the Empty pipe detection parameter.
Shows the progress.
� Ok � Busy � Not ok
Switch point empty pipe detection
The On option is selected in the Empty pipe detection parameter.
Enter hysteresis in %, below this value the measuring tube will detected as empty.
0 to 100 %
Response time empty pipe detection
A process variable is selected Enter the time before
in the Assign process variable diagnostic message S862 'Pipe
parameter ( 114).
empty' is displayed for empty
pipe detection.
0 to 100 s
Factory setting Off Cancel � 50 % 1 s
114
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Commissioning
10.6 Advanced settings
The Advanced setup submenu together with its submenus contains parameters for specific settings. Navigation to the "Advanced setup" submenu
XXXXXXXXX
20.50
mA
Main menu
0104-1
1.
Display language
English
Display/operat.
Setup
Main menu
2.
Display/operat.
Setup
Diagnostic
/ ../Setup
3.
Medium selection
XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX
/ ../Setup
4.
XXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXX
Advanced setup
/ ../Advanced setup 0092-1
5.
Ent. access code
Device tag
****
Def. access code
A0032223-EN
The number of submenus and parameters can vary depending on the device version. Certain submenus and parameters in these submenus are not described in the Operation Instructions. Instead a description is provided in the Special Documentation for the device ( "Supplementary documentation" section). Navigation "Setup" menu Advanced setup
Advanced setup
Enter access code
Sensor adjustment Totalizer 1 to n Display
116 116 116 118
Endress+Hauser
115
Commissioning
Parameter Enter access code
Parameter Installation direction
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Electrode cleaning circuit WLAN settings Heartbeat setup Configuration backup Administration
121 122
124 125
10.6.1 Using the parameter to enter the access code
Navigation "Setup" menu Advanced setup
Parameter overview with brief description
Description Enter access code to disable write protection of parameters.
User entry
Max. 16-digit character string comprising numbers, letters and special characters
10.6.2 Carrying out a sensor adjustment
The Sensor adjustment submenu contains parameters that pertain to the functionality of the sensor.
Navigation "Setup" menu Advanced setup Sensor adjustment
Sensor adjustment
Installation direction
116
Parameter overview with brief description
Description
Set sign of flow direction to match the direction of the arrow on the sensor.
Selection
Factory setting
� Flow in arrow direction
Flow in arrow direction
� Flow against arrow direction
10.6.3 Configuring the totalizer
In the "Totalizer 1 to n" submenu the individual totalizer can be configured.
116
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Commissioning
Navigation "Setup" menu Advanced setup Totalizer 1 to n
Totalizer 1 to n
Assign process variable Unit totalizer 1 to n Totalizer operation mode Failure mode
117 117 117 117
Parameter Assign process variable
Unit totalizer 1 to n Totalizer operation mode Failure mode
Parameter overview with brief description
Prerequisite
Description
Selection
Factory setting
�
Select process variable for
� Off
Volume flow
totalizer.
� Volume flow
� Mass flow
� Corrected volume
flow
A process variable is selected Select process variable totalizer Unit choose list
l
in the Assign process variable unit.
parameter ( 117) of the
Totalizer 1 to n submenu.
A process variable is selected Select totalizer calculation in the Assign process variable mode. parameter ( 117) of the Totalizer 1 to n submenu.
� Net flow total
Net flow total
� Forward flow total
� Reverse flow total
A process variable is selected Define totalizer behavior in
� Stop
Stop
in the Assign process variable alarm condition.
� Actual value
parameter ( 117) of the
� Last valid value
Totalizer 1 to n submenu.
Endress+Hauser
117
Commissioning 118
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
10.6.4 Carrying out additional display configurations
In the Display submenu you can set all the parameters associated with the configuration of the local display.
Navigation "Setup" menu Advanced setup Display
Display
Format display Value 1 display 0% bargraph value 1 100% bargraph value 1 Decimal places 1 Value 2 display Decimal places 2 Value 3 display 0% bargraph value 3 100% bargraph value 3 Decimal places 3 Value 4 display Decimal places 4 Display language Display interval Display damping Header Header text Separator Backlight
119 119 119 119 119 119 119 120 120 120 120 120 120 121 121 121 121 121 121 121
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Commissioning
Parameter Format display Value 1 display
0% bargraph value 1 100% bargraph value 1 Decimal places 1 Value 2 display
Decimal places 2
Parameter overview with brief description
Prerequisite A local display is provided.
A local display is provided.
A local display is provided. A local display is provided. A measured value is specified in the Value 1 display parameter. A local display is provided.
A measured value is specified in the Value 2 display parameter.
Description
Selection/User entry
Factory setting
Select how measured values are shown on the display.
� 1 value, max. size � 1 bargraph + 1
value � 2 values � 1 value large + 2
values � 4 values
1 value, max. size
Select the measured value that is shown on the local display.
� Volume flow � Mass flow � Corrected volume
flow � Flow velocity � Totalizer 1 � Totalizer 2 � Totalizer 3 � Current output 1 � Current output 2 * � Current output 3 * � Electronic
temperature
Volume flow
Enter 0% value for bar graph display.
Signed floating-point Country-specific:
number
� 0 l/h
� 0 gal/min (us)
Enter 100% value for bar graph display.
Signed floating-point Depends on country
number
and nominal
diameter
Select the number of decimal � x
x.xx
places for the display value. � x.x
� x.xx
� x.xxx
� x.xxxx
Select the measured value that is shown on the local display.
� None � Volume flow � Mass flow � Corrected volume
flow � Flow velocity � Conductivity � Corrected
conductivity � Totalizer 1 � Totalizer 2 � Totalizer 3 � Current output 1 � Current output 2 * � Current output 3 * � Current output 4 * � Temperature � Electronic
temperature
None
Select the number of decimal � x
x.xx
places for the display value. � x.x
� x.xx
� x.xxx
� x.xxxx
Endress+Hauser
119
Commissioning
Parameter Value 3 display
0% bargraph value 3 100% bargraph value 3 Decimal places 3 Value 4 display
Decimal places 4
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Prerequisite A local display is provided.
A selection was made in the Value 3 display parameter. A selection was made in the Value 3 display parameter. A measured value is specified in the Value 3 display parameter. A local display is provided.
A measured value is specified in the Value 4 display parameter.
Description
Selection/User entry
Factory setting
Select the measured value that is shown on the local display.
� None � Volume flow � Mass flow � Corrected volume
flow � Flow velocity � Conductivity � Corrected
conductivity � Totalizer 1 � Totalizer 2 � Totalizer 3 � Current output 1 � Current output 2 * � Current output 3 * � Current output 4 * � Temperature � Electronic
temperature
None
Enter 0% value for bar graph display.
Signed floating-point Country-specific:
number
� 0 l/h
� 0 gal/min (us)
Enter 100% value for bar graph display.
Signed floating-point 0 number
Select the number of decimal � x
x.xx
places for the display value. � x.x
� x.xx
� x.xxx
� x.xxxx
Select the measured value that is shown on the local display.
� None � Volume flow � Mass flow � Corrected volume
flow � Flow velocity � Conductivity � Corrected
conductivity � Totalizer 1 � Totalizer 2 � Totalizer 3 � Current output 1 � Current output 2 * � Current output 3 * � Current output 4 * � Temperature � Electronic
temperature
None
Select the number of decimal � x
x.xx
places for the display value. � x.x
� x.xx
� x.xxx
� x.xxxx
120
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Commissioning
Parameter Display language
Display interval Display damping Header Header text Separator Backlight
Prerequisite A local display is provided.
A local display is provided.
A local display is provided.
A local display is provided. In the Header parameter, the Free text option is selected.
A local display is provided. One of the following conditions is met: � Order code for "Display;
operation", option F "4-line, illum.; touch control" � Order code for "Display; operation", option G "4-line, illum.; touch control +WLAN" � Order code for "Display; operation", option O "Separate 4-line display, illum.; 10m/30ft cable; touch control"
Description
Selection/User entry
Factory setting
Set display language.
� English � Deutsch * � Fran�ais * � Espa�ol * � Italiano * � Nederlands * � Portuguesa * � Polski * �
(Russian) * � Svenska * � T�rk�e * � (Chinese) * �
(Japanese) * � (Korean) * � (Arabic) * � Bahasa Indonesia * � (Thai) * � ting Vit
(Vietnamese) * � cestina (Czech) *
English (alternatively, the ordered language is preset in the device)
Set time measured values are 1 to 10 s
5 s
shown on display if display
alternates between values.
Set display reaction time to fluctuations in the measured value.
0.0 to 999.9 s
0.0 s
Select header contents on local � Device tag
display.
� Free text
Device tag
Enter display header text.
Max. 12 characters such as letters, numbers or special characters (e.g. @, %, /)
------------
Select decimal separator for displaying numerical values.
� . (point) � , (comma)
. (point)
Switch the local display backlight on and off.
� Disable � Enable
Enable
* Visibility depends on order options or device settings
10.6.5 Performing electrode cleaning
The Electrode cleaning circuit submenu contains parameters that must be configured for the configuration of electrode cleaning.
The submenu is only available if the device was ordered with electrode cleaning.
Endress+Hauser
121
Commissioning
Parameter Electrode cleaning circuit ECC duration ECC recovery time ECC cleaning cycle ECC Polarity
122
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Navigation "Setup" menu Advanced setup Electrode cleaning circuit
Electrode cleaning circuit
Electrode cleaning circuit ECC duration ECC recovery time ECC cleaning cycle ECC Polarity
122 122 122 122 122
Parameter overview with brief description
Prerequisite
For the following order code: "Application package", option EC "ECC electrode cleaning"
For the following order code: "Application package", option EC "ECC electrode cleaning"
For the following order code: "Application package", option EC "ECC electrode cleaning"
For the following order code: "Application package", option EC "ECC electrode cleaning"
For the following order code: "Application package", option EC "ECC electrode cleaning"
Description
Enable the cyclic electrode cleaning circuit.
Selection/User entry/User interface
� Off � On
Enter the duration of electrode 0.01 to 30 s cleaning in seconds.
Define recovery time after electrode cleaning. During this time the current output values will be held at last valid value.
1 to 600 s
Enter the pause duration between electrode cleaning cycles.
0.5 to 168 h
Select the polarity of the electrode cleaning circuit.
� Positive � Negative
Factory setting
Off
2 s
60 s
0.5 h
Depends on the electrode material: � Platinum:
Negative option � Tantalum, Alloy
C22, stainless steel: Positive option
10.6.6 WLAN configuration
The WLAN Settings submenu guides the user systematically through all the parameters that have to be set for the WLAN configuration.
Navigation "Setup" menu Advanced setup WLAN settings
WLAN settings
WLAN
123
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Commissioning
Parameter WLAN WLAN mode SSID name Network security
Security identification
User name WLAN password WLAN IP address
Endress+Hauser
WLAN mode SSID name Network security Security identification User name WLAN password WLAN IP address WLAN passphrase Assign SSID name SSID name Connection state Received signal strength
123 123 123 123 123 123 123 124 124 124 124 124
Parameter overview with brief description
Prerequisite � � The client is activated. �
�
� � �
Description
Switch WLAN on and off.
Select WLAN mode.
Enter the user-defined SSID name (max. 32 characters). Select the security type of the WLAN network.
Select security settings and download these settings via menu Data management > Security > WLAN. Enter user name. Enter WLAN password. Enter IP address of the device WLAN interface.
Selection/User entry/User interface
� Disable � Enable
� WLAN access point
� WLAN Client
�
Factory setting Enable WLAN access point �
� Unsecured � WPA2-PSK � EAP-PEAP with
MSCHAPv2 � EAP-PEAP
MSCHAPv2 no server authentic. � EAP-TLS
� Root certificate � Device certificate � Device private key
WPA2-PSK �
�
�
4 octet: 0 to 255 (in the particular octet)
� � 192.168.1.212
123
Commissioning
Parameter WLAN passphrase
Assign SSID name SSID name
Connection state Received signal strength
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Prerequisite
The WPA2-PSK option is selected in the Security type parameter.
�
� The User-defined option is selected in the Assign SSID name parameter.
� The WLAN access point option is selected in the WLAN mode parameter.
� �
Description
Selection/User entry/User interface
Factory setting
Enter the network key (8 to 32 characters).
The network key supplied with the device should be changed during commissioning for security reasons.
8 to 32-digit character string comprising numbers, letters and special characters (without spaces)
Serial number of the measuring device (e.g. L100A802000)
Select which name will be used � Device tag for SSID: device tag or user- � User-defined defined name.
User-defined
Enter the user-defined SSID Max. 32-digit
name (max. 32 characters). character string
The user-defined SSID name may only be assigned once. If the SSID
comprising numbers, letters and special characters
name is assigned more
than once, the devices
can interfere with one
another.
EH_device designation_last 7 digits of the serial number (e.g. EH_Promag_300_A 802000)
Displays the connection status. � Connected � Not connected
Not connected
Shows the received signal strength.
� Low � Medium � High
High
10.6.7 Configuration management
After commissioning, you can save the current device configurationor restore the previous device configuration. You can do so using the Configuration management parameter and the related options found in the Configuration backup submenu.
Navigation "Setup" menu Advanced setup Configuration backup
Configuration backup
Operating time Last backup Configuration management Backup state Comparison result
125 125 125 125 125
124
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Commissioning
Parameter Operating time Last backup Configuration management
Backup state
Comparison result
Parameter overview with brief description
Description
User interface/Selection
Indicates how long the device has been in operation.
Days (d), hours (h), minutes (m) and seconds (s)
Shows when the last data backup was saved Days (d), hours (h), minutes
to HistoROM backup.
(m) and seconds (s)
Select action for managing the device data in � Cancel
the HistoROM backup.
� Execute backup
� Restore
� Compare
� Clear backup data
Shows the current status of data saving or restoring.
� None � Backup in progress � Restoring in progress � Delete in progress � Compare in progress � Restoring failed � Backup failed
Comparison of current device data with HistoROM backup.
� Settings identical � Settings not identical � No backup available � Backup settings corrupt � Check not done � Dataset incompatible
Factory setting � � Cancel
None
Check not done
Function scope of the "Configuration management" parameter
Options Cancel Execute backup
Restore
Compare Clear backup data
Description
No action is executed and the user exits the parameter.
A backup copy of the current device configuration is saved from the HistoROM backup to the memory of the device. The backup copy includes the transmitter data of the device.
The last backup copy of the device configuration is restored from the device memory to the device's HistoROM backup. The backup copy includes the transmitter data of the device.
The device configuration saved in the device memory is compared with the current device configuration of the HistoROM backup.
The backup copy of the device configuration is deleted from the memory of the device.
HistoROM backup A HistoROM is a "non-volatile" device memory in the form of an EEPROM. While this action is in progress, the configuration cannot be edited via the local display and a message on the processing status appears on the display.
10.6.8 Using parameters for device administration
The Administration submenu systematically guides the user through all the parameters that can be used for device administration purposes.
Endress+Hauser
125
Commissioning
Parameter Define access code Confirm access code
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Navigation "Setup" menu Advanced setup Administration
Administration Define access code Reset access code
Device reset
126 126 127
Using the parameter to define the access code Navigation "Setup" menu Advanced setup Administration Define access code
Define access code
Define access code Confirm access code
126 126
Parameter overview with brief description
Description
Restrict write-access to parameters to protect the configuration of the device against unintentional changes.
Confirm the entered access code.
User entry
Max. 16-digit character string comprising numbers, letters and special characters
Max. 16-digit character string comprising numbers, letters and special characters
Using the parameter to reset the access code Navigation "Setup" menu Advanced setup Administration Reset access code
Reset access code
Operating time Reset access code
127 127
126
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Commissioning
Parameter Operating time Reset access code
Parameter Device reset
Parameter overview with brief description
Description
Indicates how long the device has been in operation.
Reset access code to factory settings.
For a reset code, contact your Endress+Hauser service organization.
The reset code can only be entered via: � Web browser � DeviceCare, FieldCare (via service
interface CDI-RJ45) � Fieldbus
User interface/User entry
Days (d), hours (h), minutes (m) and seconds (s)
Character string comprising numbers, letters and special characters
Factory setting �
0x00
Using the parameter to reset the device Navigation "Setup" menu Advanced setup Administration
Parameter overview with brief description
Description
Reset the device configuration - either entirely or in part - to a defined state.
Selection
� Cancel � To delivery settings � Restart device � Restore S-DAT backup
Factory setting Cancel
10.7 Simulation
The Simulation submenu enables you to simulate, without a real flow situation, various process variables in the process and the device alarm mode and to verify downstream signal chains (switching valves or closed-control loops).
Navigation "Diagnostics" menu Simulation
Simulation
Assign simulation process variable Process variable value Status input simulation Input signal level Current input 1 to n simulation Value current input 1 to n Current output 1 to n simulation
128 128 128 128 128 128 128
Endress+Hauser
127
Commissioning
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Value current output 1 to n Frequency output simulation 1 to n Frequency value 1 to n Pulse output simulation 1 to n Pulse value 1 to n Switch output simulation 1 to n Switch status 1 to n Relay output 1 to n simulation Switch status 1 to n Device alarm simulation Diagnostic event category Diagnostic event simulation
129 129 129 129 129 129 129 129 129 129 129 130
Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter Assign simulation process variable
Process variable value Status input simulation Input signal level Current input 1 to n simulation Value current input 1 to n Current output 1 to n simulation
Prerequisite
Description
Selection/User entry/User interface
�
Select a process variable for � Off
the simulation process that is � Volume flow
activated.
� Mass flow
� Corrected volume
flow
� Flow velocity
� Conductivity *
A process variable is selected in the Assign simulation process variable parameter ( 128).
Enter the simulation value for the selected process variable.
Depends on the process variable selected
�
Switch simulation of the status � Off
input on and off.
� On
In the Status input simulation Select the signal level for the parameter, the On option is simulation of the status input. selected.
� High � Low
�
Switch simulation of the
� Off
current input on and off.
� On
In the Current input 1 to n
Enter the current value for
simulation parameter, the On simulation.
option is selected.
0 to 22.5 mA
�
Switch the simulation of the � Off
current output on and off.
� On
Factory setting Off
0 Off High Off 0 mA Off
128
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Commissioning
Parameter Value current output 1 to n Frequency output simulation 1 to n Frequency value 1 to n Pulse output simulation 1 to n
Pulse value 1 to n Switch output simulation 1 to n Switch status 1 to n Relay output 1 to n simulation Switch status 1 to n Pulse output simulation
Pulse value Device alarm simulation Diagnostic event category
Prerequisite
In the Current output 1 to n simulation parameter, the On option is selected. In the Operating mode parameter, the Frequency option is selected. In the Frequency output simulation 1 to n parameter, the On option is selected. In the Operating mode parameter, the Pulse option is selected.
In the Pulse output simulation 1 to n parameter, the Down-counting value option is selected. In the Operating mode parameter, the Switch option is selected. �
�
The On option is selected in the Switch output simulation 1 to n parameter parameter. �
In the Pulse output simulation parameter, the Down-counting value option is selected. �
�
Description
Enter the current value for simulation.
Selection/User entry/User interface
3.59 to 22.5 mA
Switch the simulation of the frequency output on and off.
� Off � On
Enter the frequency value for 0.0 to 12 500.0 Hz the simulation.
Set and switch off the pulse output simulation.
For Fixed value option: Pulse width parameter ( 104) defines the pulse width of the pulses output.
� Off � Fixed value � Down-counting
value
Enter the number of pulses for 0 to 65 535 simulation.
Switch the simulation of the switch output on and off.
� Off � On
Select the status of the status output for the simulation.
Switch simulation of the relay output on and off.
Select status of the relay output for the simulation.
� Open � Closed
� Off � On
� Open � Closed
Set and switch off the pulse output simulation.
For Fixed value option: Pulse width parameter defines the pulse width of the pulses output.
Set and switch off the pulse output simulation.
� Off � Fixed value � Down-counting
value
0 to 65 535
Switch the device alarm on and � Off
off.
� On
Select a diagnostic event category.
� Sensor � Electronics � Configuration � Process
Factory setting 3.59 mA Off 0.0 Hz Off
0 Off Open Off Open Off
0 Off Process
Endress+Hauser
129
Commissioning
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Parameter Diagnostic event simulation
Prerequisite �
Logging interval
�
* Visibility depends on order options or device settings
Description
Selection/User entry/User interface
Select a diagnostic event to simulate this event.
� Off � Diagnostic event
picklist (depends on the category selected)
Define the logging interval tlog 1.0 to 3 600.0 s for data logging. This value defines the time interval between the individual data points in the memory.
Factory setting Off
�
10.8 Protecting settings from unauthorized access
The following write protection options exist in order to protect the configuration of the measuring device from unintentional modification: � Protect access to parameters via access code 130 � Protect access to local operation via key locking 68 � Protect access to measuring device via write protection switch 131
10.8.1 Write protection via access code
The effects of the user-specific access code are as follows: � Via local operation, the parameters for the measuring device configuration are write-
protected and their values can no longer be changed. � Device access is protected via the Web browser, as are the parameters for the measuring
device configuration. � Device access is protected via FieldCare or DeviceCare (via CDI-RJ45 service interface), as
are the parameters for the measuring device configuration.
Defining the access code via local display 1. Navigate to the Define access code parameter ( 126). 2. Define a max. 16-digit character string comprising numbers, letters and special
characters as the access code. 3. Enter the access code again in the Confirm access code parameter ( 126) to
confirm the code. The -symbol appears in front of all write-protected parameters.
The device automatically locks the write-protected parameters again if a key is not pressed for 10 minutes in the navigation and editing view. The device locks the write-protected parameters automatically after 60 s if the user skips back to the operational display mode from the navigation and editing view.
� If parameter write protection is activated via an access code, it can also only be deactivated via this access code 67.
� The user role with which the user is currently logged on via the local display 67 is indicated by the Access status parameter. Navigation path: Operation Access status
Parameters which can always be modified via the local display Certain parameters that do not affect the measurement are excepted from parameter write protection via the local display. Despite the user-specific access code, they can always be modified, even if the other parameters are locked.
130
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Commissioning
Language
Parameters for configuring the local display
Format display
Contrast display
Display interval
Parameters for configuring the totalizer
Control Totalizer
Preset value
Reset all totalizers
Defining the access code via the Web browser 1. Navigate to the Define access code parameter ( 126). 2. Define a max. 16-digit numeric code as an access code. 3. Enter the access code again in the Confirm access code parameter ( 126) to
confirm the code. The Web browser switches to the login page.
If no action is performed for 10 minutes, the Web browser automatically returns to the login page. � If parameter write protection is activated via an access code, it can also only be
deactivated via this access code 67. � The user role with which the user is currently logged on via Web browser is
indicated by the Access status parameter. Navigation path: Operation Access status
Resetting the access code If you misplace the user-specific access code, it is possible to reset the code to the factory setting. A reset code must be entered for this purpose. The user-specific access code can then be defined again afterwards.
Via Web browser, FieldCare, DeviceCare (via CDI-RJ45 service interface), fieldbus For a reset code, contact your Endress+Hauser service organization.
1. Navigate to the Reset access code parameter ( 127). 2. Enter the reset code.
The access code has been reset to the factory setting 0000. It can be redefined 130.
10.8.2 Write protection via write protection switch
Unlike parameter write protection via a user-specific access code, this allows write access to the entire operating menu - except for the "Contrast display" parameter - to be locked. The parameter values are now read only and cannot be edited any more (exception "Contrast display" parameter): � Via local display � Via EtherNet/IP protocol
Endress+Hauser
131
Commissioning
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
1.
OFF ON 1 2 3 4
A0029630
Setting the write protection (WP) switch on the main electronics module to the ON position enables hardware write protection. In the Locking status parameter the Hardware locked option is displayed
133. In addition, on the local display the -symbol appears in front of the parameters in the header of the operational display and in the navigation view.
XXXXXXXXX
20.50
XX
XX
A0029425
2. Setting the write protection (WP) switch on the main electronics module to the OFF position (factory setting) disables hardware write protection. No option is displayed in the Locking status parameter 133. On the local display, the -symbol disappears from in front of the parameters in the header of the operational display and in the navigation view.
132
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Operation
11 Operation
11.1 Reading the device locking status
Device active write protection: Locking status parameter
Operation Locking status
Function scope of the "Locking status" parameter
Options None
Hardware locked
Temporarily locked
Description
The access status displayed in the Access status parameter applies 67. Only appears on local display.
The DIP switch for hardware locking is activated on the PCB board. This locks write access to the parameters (e.g. via local display or operating tool) 131.
Write access to the parameters is temporarily locked on account of internal processes running in the device (e.g. data upload/download, reset etc.). Once the internal processing has been completed, the parameters can be changed once again.
11.2 Adjusting the operating language
Detailed information: � To configure the operating language 93 � For information on the operating languages supported by the measuring device
203
11.3 Configuring the display
Detailed information: � On the basic settings for the local display 110 � On the advanced settings for the local display 118
11.4 Reading measured values
With the Measured values submenu, it is possible to read all the measured values. Navigation "Diagnostics" menu Measured values
Measured values Process variables Input values Output values Totalizer
134 135 136 134
Endress+Hauser
133
Operation
Parameter Volume flow Mass flow Corrected volume flow Flow velocity Conductivity Density
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
11.4.1 "Process variables" submenu
The Process variables submenu contains all the parameters needed to display the current measured values for each process variable.
Navigation "Diagnostics" menu Measured values Process variables
Process variables
Volume flow Mass flow Corrected volume flow Flow velocity Conductivity Density
Parameter overview with brief description
Description
Displays the volume flow that is currently measured.
Dependency The unit is taken from the Volume flow unit parameter ( 96).
Displays the mass flow currently calculated.
Dependency The unit is taken from the Mass flow unit parameter ( 96).
Displays the corrected volume flow that is currently calculated.
Dependency The unit is taken from the Corrected volume flow unit parameter.
Displays the flow velocity that is currently calculated.
Displays the conductivity that is currently measured.
Dependency The unit is taken from the Conductivity unit parameter.
Displays the current fixed density or density read in from an external device.
Dependency The unit is taken from the Density unit parameter.
User interface Signed floating-point number
Signed floating-point number
Signed floating-point number
Signed floating-point number Signed floating-point number Signed floating-point number
11.4.2 "Totalizer" submenu
The Totalizer submenu contains all the parameters needed to display the current measured values for every totalizer.
134
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Operation
Navigation "Diagnostics" menu Measured values Totalizer
Totalizer
Totalizer value 1 to n Totalizer overflow 1 to n
135 135
Parameter Totalizer value 1 to n
Totalizer overflow 1 to n
Parameter overview with brief description
Prerequisite
A process variable is selected in the Assign process variable parameter ( 117) of the Totalizer 1 to n submenu.
A process variable is selected in the Assign process variable parameter ( 117) of the Totalizer 1 to n submenu.
Description
Displays the current totalizer counter value.
User interface
Signed floating-point number
Displays the current totalizer overflow. Integer with sign
11.4.3 "Input values" submenu
The Input values submenu guides you systematically to the individual input values.
Navigation "Diagnostics" menu Measured values Input values
Input values Current input 1 to n Status input 1 to n
135 136
Input values of current input The Current input 1 to n submenu contains all the parameters needed to display the current measured values for every current input.
Navigation "Diagnostics" menu Measured values Input values Current input 1 to n
Current input 1 to n
Measured values 1 to n Measured current 1 to n
136 136
Endress+Hauser
135
Operation
Parameter Measured values 1 to n Measured current 1 to n
Parameter Value status input
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Parameter overview with brief description
Description Displays the current input value. Displays the current value of the current input.
User interface Signed floating-point number 0 to 22.5 mA
Input values of status input The Status input 1 to n submenu contains all the parameters needed to display the current measured values for every status input.
Navigation "Diagnostics" menu Measured values Input values Status input 1 to n
Status input 1 to n
Value status input
136
Parameter overview with brief description
Description Shows the current input signal level.
� High � Low
User interface
11.4.4 Output values
The Output values submenu contains all the parameters needed to display the current measured values for every output.
Navigation "Diagnostics" menu Measured values Output values
Output values Current output 1 to n Pulse/frequency/switch output
1 to n
Relay output 1 to n
136 137 137
Output values of current output The Value current output submenu contains all the parameters needed to display the current measured values for every current output.
136
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Operation
Navigation "Diagnostics" menu Measured values Output values Value current output 1 to n
Current output 1 to n
Output current 1 to n Measured current 1 to n
137 137
Parameter Output current 1
Measured current
Parameter overview with brief description
Description
Displays the current value currently calculated for the current output.
Displays the current value currently measured for the current output.
User interface 3.59 to 22.5 mA
0 to 30 mA
Output values for pulse/frequency/switch output The Pulse/frequency/switch output 1 to n submenu contains all the parameters needed to display the current measured values for every pulse/frequency/switch output.
Navigation "Diagnostics" menu Measured values Output values Pulse/frequency/switch output 1 to n
Pulse/frequency/switch output
1 to n Output frequency 1 to n Pulse output 1 to n Switch status 1 to n
137 137 137
Parameter Output frequency 1 to n
Pulse output 1 to n
Switch status 1 to n
Parameter overview with brief description
Prerequisite
Description
In the Operating mode parameter, the Displays the value currently measured
Frequency option is selected.
for the frequency output.
The Pulse option is selected in the
Displays the pulse frequency currently
Operating mode parameter parameter. output.
The Switch option is selected in the Operating mode parameter.
Displays the current switch output status.
User interface 0.0 to 12 500.0 Hz
Positive floating-point number � Open � Closed
Output values for relay output The Relay output 1 to n submenu contains all the parameters needed to display the current measured values for every relay output.
Endress+Hauser
137
Operation
Parameter Switch status Switch cycles Max. switch cycles number
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Navigation "Diagnostics" menu Measured values Output values Relay output 1 to n
Relay output 1 to n
Switch status Switch cycles Max. switch cycles number
138 138 138
Parameter overview with brief description
Description Shows the current relay switch status.
Shows number of all performed switch cycles. Shows the maximal number of guaranteed switch cycles.
User interface
� Open � Closed
Positive integer
Positive integer
11.5 Adapting the measuring device to the process conditions
The following are available for this purpose: � Basic settings using theSetup menu ( 94) � Advanced settings using theAdvanced setup submenu ( 115)
11.6 Performing a totalizer reset
Navigation "Operation" menu Totalizer handling
Totalizer handling
Control Totalizer 1 to n Preset value 1 to n Reset all totalizers
139 139 139
138
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Operation
Parameter Control Totalizer 1 to n Preset value 1 to n
Reset all totalizers
Parameter overview with brief description
Prerequisite
Description
Selection/User entry
Factory setting
A process variable is selected Control totalizer value. in the Assign process variable parameter ( 117) of the Totalizer 1 to n submenu.
� Totalize � Reset + hold � Preset + hold � Reset + totalize � Preset + totalize � Hold
Totalize
A process variable is selected Specify start value for totalizer. Signed floating-point 0 l
in the Assign process variable
parameter ( 117) of the
Dependency
Totalizer 1 to n submenu.
The unit of the selected
process variable is
number
specified for the totalizer
in the Unit totalizer
parameter ( 117).
�
Reset all totalizers to 0 and
� Cancel
Cancel
start.
� Reset + totalize
11.6.1 Function scope of the "Control Totalizer" parameter
Options Totalize Reset + hold Preset + hold
Reset + totalize Preset + totalize
Hold
Description
The totalizer is started or continues running.
The totaling process is stopped and the totalizer is reset to 0.
The totaling process is stopped and the totalizer is set to its defined start value from the Preset value parameter.
The totalizer is reset to 0 and the totaling process is restarted.
The totalizer is set to the defined start value from the Preset value parameter and the totaling process is restarted.
Totalizing is stopped.
11.6.2 Function scope of the "Reset all totalizers" parameter
Options Cancel Reset + totalize
Description
No action is executed and the user exits the parameter.
Resets all totalizers to 0 and restarts the totaling process. This deletes all the flow values previously totalized.
11.7 Showing data logging
The Extended HistoROM application package must be enabled in the device (order option) for the Data logging submenu to appear. This contains all the parameters for the measured value history.
Data logging is also available via: � Plant Asset Management Tool FieldCare 79. � Web browser Function range � A total of 1000 measured values can be stored � 4 logging channels � Adjustable logging interval for data logging � Displays the measured value trend for each logging channel in the form of a chart
Endress+Hauser
139
Operation 140
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
/ ../XXXXXXXX 175.77
40.69 l/h
-100s
0
A0034352
� x-axis: depending on the number of channels selected displays 250 to 1000 measured values of a process variable.
� y-axis: displays the approximate measured value span and constantly adapts this to the ongoing measurement. If the length of the logging interval or the assignment of the process variables to the channels is changed, the content of the data logging is deleted.
Navigation "Diagnostics" menu Data logging
Data logging
Assign channel 1 Assign channel 2 Assign channel 3 Assign channel 4 Logging interval Clear logging data Data logging Logging delay Data logging control Data logging status Entire logging duration
Display channel 1 Display channel 2 Display channel 3 Display channel 4
141 141 141 141 141 141 141 141 141 142 142
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Operation
Parameter Assign channel 1
Assign channel 2
Assign channel 3
Assign channel 4
Logging interval Clear logging data Data logging Logging delay Data logging control
Parameter overview with brief description
Prerequisite
Description
Selection/User entry/User interface
Factory setting
The Extended HistoROM application package is available.
Assign process variable to logging channel.
� Off
Off
� Volume flow
� Mass flow
� Corrected volume
flow
� Flow velocity
� Conductivity *
� Current output 1
� Current output 2 *
� Current output 3 *
� Current output 4 *
� Electronic
temperature
The Extended HistoROM application package is available.
The software options currently enabled are displayed in the Software option overview parameter.
Assign process variable to logging channel.
Picklist, see Assign Off channel 1 parameter ( 141)
The Extended HistoROM application package is available.
The software options currently enabled are displayed in the Software option overview parameter.
Assign process variable to logging channel.
Picklist, see Assign Off channel 1 parameter ( 141)
The Extended HistoROM application package is available.
The software options currently enabled are displayed in the Software option overview parameter.
Assign process variable to logging channel.
Picklist, see Assign Off channel 1 parameter ( 141)
The Extended HistoROM application package is available.
Define the logging interval for data logging. This value defines the time interval between the individual data points in the memory.
0.1 to 3 600.0 s
1.0 s
The Extended HistoROM application package is available.
Clear the entire logging data. � Cancel � Clear data
Cancel
�
Select the data logging
� Overwriting
Overwriting
method.
� Not overwriting
In the Data logging
Enter the time delay for
0 to 999 h
0 h
parameter, the Not
measured value logging.
overwriting option is selected.
In the Data logging
Start and stop measured value
parameter, the Not
logging.
overwriting option is selected.
� None � Delete + start � Stop
None
Endress+Hauser
141
Operation
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Parameter Data logging status Entire logging duration
Prerequisite
Description
In the Data logging
Displays the measured value
parameter, the Not
logging status.
overwriting option is selected.
In the Data logging
Displays the total logging
parameter, the Not
duration.
overwriting option is selected.
Selection/User entry/User interface
� Done � Delay active � Active � Stopped
Positive floatingpoint number
Factory setting Done 0 s
* Visibility depends on order options or device settings
142
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Diagnostics and troubleshooting
12 Diagnostics and troubleshooting
12.1 General troubleshooting
For local display
Error Local display dark and no output signals Local display dark and no output signals Local display dark and no output signals Local display dark and no output signals
Local display dark and no output signals
Local display is dark, but signal output is within the valid range
Local display is dark, but signal output is within the valid range
Local display is dark, but signal output is within the valid range Backlighting of local display is red
Text on local display appears in a foreign language and cannot be understood.
Message on local display: "Communication Error" "Check Electronics"
Possible causes
Solution
Supply voltage does not match the Apply the correct supply voltage . value indicated on the nameplate.
The polarity of the supply voltage is Correct the polarity. wrong.
No contact between connecting cables and terminals.
Check the connection of the cables and correct if necessary.
Terminals are not plugged into the I/O electronics module correctly. Terminals are not plugged into the main electronics module correctly.
Check terminals.
I/O electronics module is defective. Main electronics module is defective.
Order spare part 173.
Display is set too bright or too dark.
� Set the display brighter by simultaneously pressing + .
� Set the display darker by simultaneously pressing + .
The cable of the display module is not plugged in correctly.
Insert the plug correctly into the main electronics module and display module.
Display module is defective.
Order spare part 173.
Diagnostic event with "Alarm" diagnostic behavior has occurred. Incorrect operating language is configured.
Communication between the display module and the electronics is interrupted.
Take remedial measures 153
1. Press + for 2 s ("home position"). 2. Press . 3. Set the desired language in the Display language parameter ( 121).
� Check the cable and the connector between the main electronics module and display module.
� Order spare part 173.
For output signals
Error
Possible causes
Signal output outside the valid range
Main electronics module is defective.
Device shows correct value on local Configuration error display, but signal output is incorrect, though in the valid range.
Device measures incorrectly.
Configuration error or device is operated outside the application.
Solution Order spare part 173.
Check and correct the parameter configuration.
1. Check and correct parameter configuration. 2. Observe limit values specified in the "Technical Data".
Endress+Hauser
143
Diagnostics and troubleshooting
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
For access
Error No write access to parameters No write access to parameters No connection via EtherNet/IP Not connecting to Web server
Not connecting to Web server
Not connecting to Web server
Possible causes
Solution
Hardware write protection enabled
Set the write protection switch on main electronics module to the OFF position 131.
Current user role has limited access 1. Check user role 67.
authorization
2. Enter correct customer-specific
access code 67.
Device plug connected incorrectly
Check the pin assignment of the connector .
Web server disabled
Using the "FieldCare" or "DeviceCare" operating tool, check whether the Web server of the measuring device is enabled, and enable it if necessary 75.
Incorrect setting for the Ethernet interface of the computer
1. Check the properties of the Internet protocol (TCP/IP) 70 71. 2. Check the network settings with the IT manager.
� Incorrect IP address � IP address is not known
1. If addressing via hardware: open the transmitter and check the IP address configured (last octet). 2. Check the IP address of the measuring device with the network manager. 3. If the IP address is not known, set DIP switch no. 10 to ON, restart the device and enter the factory IP address 192.168.1.212.
EtherNet/IP communication is interrupted by enabling the DIP switch.
Web browser setting "Use a Proxy Server for Your LAN" is enabled
Disable the use of the proxy server in the Web browser settings of the computer. Using the example of MS Internet Explorer: 1. Under Control Panel open Internet options. 2. Select the Connections tab and then double-click LAN settings. 3. In the LAN settings disable the use of the proxy server and select OK to confirm.
Apart from the active network
� Make sure that no other network
connection to the measuring device, connections are established by
other network connections are also the computer (also no WLAN)
being used.
and close other programs with
network access to the computer.
� If using a docking station for
notebooks, make sure that a
network connection to another
network is not active.
Incorrect WLAN access data
� Check WLAN network status. � Log on to the device again using
WLAN access data. � Verify that WLAN is enabled on
the measuring device and operating device 70.
WLAN communication disabled
�
144
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Diagnostics and troubleshooting
Error
Possible causes
Solution
Not connecting to Web server, FieldCare or DeviceCare
No WLAN network available
� Check if WLAN reception is present: LED on display module is lit blue
� Check if WLAN connection is enabled: LED on display module flashes blue
� Switch on instrument function.
Network connection not present or WLAN network is weak. unstable
� Operating device is outside of reception range: Check network status on operating device.
� To improve network performance, use an external WLAN antenna.
Parallel WLAN and Ethernet communication
� Check network settings. � Temporarily enable only the
WLAN as an interface.
Web browser frozen and operation Data transfer active no longer possible
Wait until data transfer or current action is finished.
Connection lost
1. Check cable connection and power supply. 2. Refresh the Web browser and restart if necessary.
Content of Web browser incomplete or difficult to read
Not using optimum version of Web server.
1. Use the correct Web browser version 69. 2. Clear the Web browser cache and restart the Web browser.
Unsuitable view settings.
Change the font size/display ratio of the Web browser.
No or incomplete display of contents in the Web browser
� JavaScript not enabled � JavaScript cannot be enabled
1. Enable JavaScript. 2. Enter http://XXX.XXX.X.XXX/ basic.html as the IP address.
Operation with FieldCare or DeviceCare via CDI-RJ45 service interface (port 8000)
Firewall of computer or network is preventing communication
Depending on the settings of the firewall used on the computer or in the network, the firewall must be adapted or disabled to allow FieldCare/DeviceCare access.
Flashing of firmware with FieldCare Firewall of computer or network is or DeviceCare via CDI-RJ45 service preventing communication interface (via port 8000 or TFTP ports)
Depending on the settings of the firewall used on the computer or in the network, the firewall must be adapted or disabled to allow FieldCare/DeviceCare access.
12.2 Diagnostic information via light emitting diodes
12.2.1 Transmitter
Different LEDs in the transmitter provide information on the device status.
Endress+Hauser
145
Diagnostics and troubleshooting
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
12345
1 Supply voltage 2 Device status 3 network status 4 Port 1 active: EtherNet/IP 5 Port 2 active: EtherNet/IP and service interface (CDI)
A0029629
LED 1 Supply voltage
2 Device status/module status (normal operation)
Color Off Green Off Green Flashing green Flashing red
Red
Flashing red/green
2 Device status/module Flashes red slowly status (during start-up) Flashes red quickly
3 Network status
Off Green Flashing green
Red
4 Port 1 active: Ethernet/IP
5 Port 2 active: Ethernet/IP and service interface (CDI)
Flashing red Flashing red/green Off White Flashing white Off Yellow Flashing yellow
Meaning Supply voltage is off or too low. Supply voltage is ok. Firmware error. Device status is ok. Device is not configured. A diagnostic event with "Warning" diagnostic behavior has occurred. A diagnostic event with "Alarm" diagnostic behavior has occurred. The device restarts/self-test. If > 30 seconds: problem with the boot loader. If > 30 seconds: compatibility problem when reading the firmware. The device does not have an EtherNet/IP address. EtherNet/IP connection is active. The device has an Ethernet/IP address but no EtherNet/IP connection is active. The EtherNet/IP address of the device has been assigned twice. EtherNet/IP connection is in the "time out" mode. The device restarts/self-test. Not connected or no connection established. Connected and connection established. Communication not active. Not connected or no connection established. Connected and connection established. Communication not active.
146
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Diagnostics and troubleshooting
12.3 Diagnostic information on local display
12.3.1 Diagnostic message
Faults detected by the self-monitoring system of the measuring device are displayed as a diagnostic message in alternation with the operational display.
Operational display in alarm condition 21
Diagnostic message
XXXXXXXXX
S
20.50
X
XX
XXXXXXXXX
S801
Supply voltage
i
S
3 4
Menu
1 Status signal 2 Diagnostic behavior 3 Diagnostic behavior with diagnostic code 4 Short text 5 Operating elements
5
A0029426-EN
If two or more diagnostic events are pending simultaneously, only the message of the diagnostic event with the highest priority is shown.
Other diagnostic events that have occurred can be displayed in the Diagnostics menu: � Via parameter 165 � Via submenus 166
Status signals The status signals provide information on the state and reliability of the device by categorizing the cause of the diagnostic information (diagnostic event).
The status signals are categorized according to VDI/VDE 2650 and NAMUR Recommendation NE 107: F = Failure, C = Function Check, S = Out of Specification, M = Maintenance Required
Symbol
Meaning
Failure A device error has occurred. The measured value is no longer valid.
Function check The device is in service mode (e.g. during a simulation).
Out of specification The device is operated: Outside its technical specification limits (e.g. outside the process temperature range)
Maintenance required Maintenance is required. The measured value remains valid.
Endress+Hauser
147
Diagnostics and troubleshooting
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Diagnostic behavior
Symbol
Meaning
Alarm � Measurement is interrupted. � Signal outputs and totalizers assume the defined alarm condition. � A diagnostic message is generated.
Warning Measurement is resumed. The signal outputs and totalizers are not affected. A diagnostic message is generated.
Diagnostic information The fault can be identified using the diagnostic information. The short text helps you by providing information about the fault. In addition, the corresponding symbol for the diagnostic behavior is displayed in front of the diagnostic information on the local display.
Diagnostic behavior
Diagnostic information
Diagnostic code
Status signal
Diagnostic number
Short text
Example
A0013962
A0013958
NAMUR NE 107
842 3-digit number
Process limit
Operating elements
Key
Meaning
Plus key
In a menu, submenu Opens the message about remedy information.
Enter key
In a menu, submenu Opens the operating menu.
148
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Diagnostics and troubleshooting
12.3.2 Calling up remedial measures
XXXXXXXXX
S
20.50
X
XX
XXXXXXXXX
S801
Supply voltage
i
S
Menu
1.
Diagnostic list
S
1
Diagnostics 1 S801 Supply voltage
Diagnostics 2
Diagnostics 3
2.
2 Supply voltage
(ID:203) 3
4
S801 0d00h02m25s
5
Increase supply voltage 6
3.
29 Message about remedial measures
1 Diagnostic information 2 Short text 3 Service ID 4 Diagnostic behavior with diagnostic code 5 Operation time of occurrence 6 Remedial measures
A0029431-EN
1. The user is in the diagnostic message. Press ( symbol). The Diagnostic list submenu opens.
2. Select the desired diagnostic event with or and press . The message about the remedial measures opens.
3. Press + simultaneously. The message about the remedial measures closes.
The user is in the Diagnostics menu at an entry for a diagnostics event, e.g. in the Diagnostic list submenu or Previous diagnostics parameter.
1. Press . The message for the remedial measures for the selected diagnostic event opens.
2. Press + simultaneously. The message for the remedial measures closes.
12.4 Diagnostic information in the Web browser
12.4.1 Diagnostic options
Any faults detected by the measuring device are displayed in the Web browser on the home page once the user has logged on.
Endress+Hauser
149
Diagnostics and troubleshooting
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
1
2
3
1 Status area with status signal 2 Diagnostic information 3 Remedy information with Service ID
A0031056
In addition, diagnostic events which have occurred can be shown in the Diagnostics menu: � Via parameter 165 � Via submenu 166
Status signals The status signals provide information on the state and reliability of the device by categorizing the cause of the diagnostic information (diagnostic event).
Symbol
Meaning
Failure A device error has occurred. The measured value is no longer valid.
Function check The device is in service mode (e.g. during a simulation).
Out of specification The device is operated: Outside its technical specification limits (e.g. outside the process temperature range)
Maintenance required Maintenance is required. The measured value is still valid.
The status signals are categorized in accordance with VDI/VDE 2650 and NAMUR Recommendation NE 107.
12.4.2 Calling up remedy information
Remedy information is provided for every diagnostic event to ensure that problems can be rectified quickly. These measures are displayed in red along with the diagnostic event and the related diagnostic information.
12.5 Diagnostic information in FieldCare or DeviceCare
12.5.1 Diagnostic options
Any faults detected by the measuring device are displayed on the home page of the operating tool once the connection has been established.
150
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Diagnostics and troubleshooting
1
Xxxxxx/.../.../ Device name: Xxxxxxx Device tag: Xxxxxxx Status signal:
Function check (C)
Mass flow: Volume flow:
12.34 kg/h 12.34 m�/h
Xxxxxx P Diagnostics 1: P Remedy information: P Access status tooling:
+
Operation
+
Setup
+
Diagnostics
+
Expert
C485 Simu... Deactivate... Mainenance
Failure (F)
Function check (C)
2
Diagnostics 1: Remedy information:
C485 Simulation measured vari... Deactivate Simulation (Service...
Out of spezification (S)
3
Maintenance required (M)
Endress+Hauser
1 Status area with status signal 147 2 Diagnostic information 148 3 Remedy information with Service ID
A0021799-EN
In addition, diagnostic events which have occurred can be shown in the Diagnostics menu: � Via parameter 165 � Via submenu 166
Diagnostic information The fault can be identified using the diagnostic information. The short text helps you by providing information about the fault. In addition, the corresponding symbol for the diagnostic behavior is displayed in front of the diagnostic information on the local display.
Example
Diagnostic behavior
A0013962
Diagnostic information
Diagnostic code
Status signal
Diagnostic number
Short text
A0013958
NAMUR NE 107
842 3-digit number
Process limit
12.5.2 Calling up remedy information
Remedy information is provided for every diagnostic event to ensure that problems can be rectified quickly: � On the home page
Remedy information is displayed in a separate field below the diagnostics information. � In the Diagnostics menu
Remedy information can be called up in the working area of the user interface.
151
Diagnostics and troubleshooting
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
The user is in the Diagnostics menu.
1. Call up the desired parameter.
2. On the right in the working area, mouse over the parameter. A tool tip with remedy information for the diagnostic event appears.
12.6 Diagnostic information via communication interface
12.6.1 Reading out diagnostic information
The current diagnostic event and associated diagnostic information can be read out via the input assembly (fix assembly):
Bytes Content
0
1
2
3
"Empty" or "Reserved"
4
5
"Empty" or "Padding bytes"
6
7
Diagnostic number of the diagnostic
event that is displayed in the
Actual diagnostics parameter , e.g.
242
For the content of bytes 8 to 16
12.7 Adapting the diagnostic information
12.7.1 Adapting the diagnostic behavior
Each item of diagnostic information is assigned a specific diagnostic behavior at the factory. The user can change this assignment for specific diagnostic information in the Diagnostic behavior submenu. Expert System Diagnostic handling Diagnostic behavior You can assign the following options to the diagnostic number as the diagnostic behavior:
Options Alarm
Warning Logbook entry only
Off
Description
The device stops measurement. The totalizers assume the defined alarm condition. A diagnostic message is generated. The background lighting changes to red.
The device continues to measure. The totalizers are not affected. A diagnostic message is generated.
The device continues to measure. The diagnostic message is displayed only in the Event logbook submenu (Event list submenu) and is not displayed in alternation with the operational display.
The diagnostic event is ignored, and no diagnostic message is generated or entered.
152
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Diagnostics and troubleshooting
12.8 Overview of diagnostic information
The amount of diagnostic information and the number of measured variables affected increase if the measuring device has one or more application packages. In the case of some items of diagnostic information, the diagnostic behavior can be changed. Change the diagnostic information 152
12.8.1 Diagnostic of sensor
Diagnostic information
No.
Short text
043 Sensor short circuit
Status signal Diagnostic behavior [from the factory] 1)
S Warning
1) Diagnostic behavior can be changed.
Remedy instructions
1. Check sensor cable and sensor 2. Execute Heartbeat Verification 3. Replace sensor cable or sensor
Coding of diagnostic information (hex)
0x8000153
No. 082 Data storage
Diagnostic information Short text
Status signal Diagnostic behavior
F Alarm
Remedy instructions
1. Check module connections 2. Contact service
Coding of diagnostic information (hex)
0x10000E7
No. 083 Memory content
Diagnostic information Short text
Status signal Diagnostic behavior
F Alarm
Remedy instructions
Coding of diagnostic information (hex)
1. Restart device 2. Restore HistoROM S-DAT backup
('Device reset' parameter) 3. Replace HistoROM S-DAT
0x10000A0
Diagnostic information
No.
Short text
169 Conductivity measurement failed
Status signal Diagnostic behavior
M Warning
Remedy instructions
1. Check grounding conditions 2. Deactivate conductivity
measurement
Coding of diagnostic information (hex)
0x400038A
No. 170 Coil resistance
Diagnostic information Short text
Status signal Diagnostic behavior
F Alarm
Remedy instructions
Check ambient and process temperature
Coding of diagnostic information (hex)
� 0x10002D8 � 0x10002D9
Endress+Hauser
153
Diagnostics and troubleshooting
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Diagnostic information
No.
Short text
180 Temperature sensor defective
Status signal Diagnostic behavior
F Warning
Remedy instructions
1. Check sensor connections 2. Replace sensor cable or sensor 3. Turn off temperature
measurement
Coding of diagnostic information (hex)
� 0x10000D5 � 0x10000D6
No. 181 Sensor connection
Diagnostic information Short text
Status signal Diagnostic behavior
F Alarm
Remedy instructions
1. Check sensor cable and sensor 2. Execute Heartbeat Verification 3. Replace sensor cable or sensor
Coding of diagnostic information (hex)
� 0x100011C � 0x10002E0
12.8.2 Diagnostic of electronic
No. 201 Device failure
Diagnostic information Short text
Status signal Diagnostic behavior
F Alarm
Remedy instructions
1. Restart device 2. Contact service
Coding of diagnostic information (hex)
0x100014B
Diagnostic information
No.
Short text
242 Software incompatible
Status signal Diagnostic behavior
F Alarm
Remedy instructions
Coding of diagnostic information (hex)
1. Check software
0x1000067
2. Flash or change main electronics
module
Diagnostic information
No.
Short text
252 Modules incompatible
Status signal Diagnostic behavior
F Alarm
Remedy instructions
1. Check electronic modules 2. Change electronic modules
Coding of diagnostic information (hex)
0x100006B
Diagnostic information
No.
Short text
252 Modules incompatible
Status signal Diagnostic behavior
F Alarm
Remedy instructions
Coding of diagnostic information (hex)
1. Check if correct electronic modul is plugged
2. Replace electronic module
0x10002C0
154
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Diagnostic information
No.
Short text
262 Sensor electronic connection faulty
Status signal Diagnostic behavior
F Alarm
Diagnostic information
No.
Short text
270 Main electronic failure
Status signal Diagnostic behavior
F Alarm
Diagnostic information
No.
Short text
271 Main electronic failure
Status signal Diagnostic behavior
F Alarm
Diagnostic information
No.
Short text
272 Main electronic failure
Status signal Diagnostic behavior
F Alarm
Diagnostic information
No.
Short text
273 Main electronic failure
Status signal Diagnostic behavior
F Alarm
Diagnostic information
No.
Short text
275 I/O module 1 to n defective
Status signal Diagnostic behavior
F Alarm
Endress+Hauser
Diagnostics and troubleshooting
Remedy instructions
Coding of diagnostic information (hex)
1. Check or replace connection cable between sensor electronic module (ISEM) and main electronics
2. Check or replace ISEM or main electronics
0x1000149
Remedy instructions Change main electronic module
Coding of diagnostic information (hex)
� 0x1000078 � 0x100007C � 0x1000080 � 0x100009F � 0x10002D7
Remedy instructions
Coding of diagnostic information (hex)
1. Restart device
0x100007D
2. Change main electronic module
Remedy instructions
1. Restart device 2. Contact service
Coding of diagnostic information (hex)
0x1000079
Remedy instructions Change electronic
Coding of diagnostic information (hex)
� 0x1000098 � 0x10000E5
Remedy instructions Change I/O module
Coding of diagnostic information (hex)
0x100007A
155
Diagnostics and troubleshooting
Diagnostic information
No.
Short text
276 I/O module 1 to n faulty
Status signal Diagnostic behavior
F Alarm
No. 283 Memory content
Diagnostic information Short text
Status signal Diagnostic behavior
F Alarm
Diagnostic information
No.
Short text
302 Device verification active
Status signal Diagnostic behavior
C Warning
No. 311 Electronic failure
Diagnostic information Short text
Status signal Diagnostic behavior
M Warning
Diagnostic information
No.
Short text
332 Writing in HistoROM backup failed
Status signal Diagnostic behavior
F Alarm
Diagnostic information
No.
Short text
361 I/O module 1 to n faulty
Status signal Diagnostic behavior
F Alarm
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Remedy instructions
1. Restart device 2. Change I/O module
Coding of diagnostic information (hex)
� 0x100007B � 0x1000081
Remedy instructions
1. Reset device 2. Contact service
Coding of diagnostic information (hex)
� 0x10000E1 � 0x100016F
Remedy instructions
Device verification active, please wait.
Coding of diagnostic information (hex)
0x20001EE
Remedy instructions
1. Do not reset device 2. Contact service
Coding of diagnostic information (hex)
0x40000E2
Remedy instructions
Replace user interface board Ex d/XP: replace transmitter
Coding of diagnostic information (hex)
0x10002C7
Remedy instructions
1. Restart device 2. Check electronic modules 3. Change I/O Modul or main
electronics
Coding of diagnostic information (hex)
0x1000095
156
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Diagnostic information
No.
Short text
372 Sensor electronic (ISEM) faulty
Status signal Diagnostic behavior
F Alarm
Diagnostic information
No.
Short text
373 Sensor electronic (ISEM) faulty
Status signal Diagnostic behavior
F Alarm
Diagnostic information
No.
Short text
375 I/O- 1 to n communication failed
Status signal Diagnostic behavior
F Alarm
Diagnostic information
No.
Short text
376 Sensor electronic (ISEM) faulty
Status signal Diagnostic behavior [from the factory] 1)
S Warning
1) Diagnostic behavior can be changed.
Diagnostic information
No.
Short text
377 Sensor electronic (ISEM) faulty
Status signal Diagnostic behavior [from the factory] 1)
S Warning
1) Diagnostic behavior can be changed.
No. 382 Data storage
Diagnostic information Short text
Status signal Diagnostic behavior
F Alarm
Endress+Hauser
Diagnostics and troubleshooting
Remedy instructions
Coding of diagnostic information (hex)
1. Restart device 2. Check if failure recurs 3. Replace sensor electronic module
(ISEM)
� 0x10002CB � 0x10002CC � 0x10002CD � 0x10002CE � 0x10002CF � 0x10002D0
Remedy instructions
1. Transfer data or reset device 2. Contact service
Coding of diagnostic information (hex)
0x10002D1
Remedy instructions
1. Restart device 2. Check if failure recurs 3. Replace module rack inclusive
electronic modules
Coding of diagnostic information (hex)
0x1000107
Remedy instructions
Coding of diagnostic information (hex)
1. Replace sensor electronic module (ISEM)
2. Turn off diagnostic message
� 0x8000119 � 0x800016A � 0x80002DA � 0x80002DB � 0x80002DC � 0x80002DD � 0x80002DF
Remedy instructions
Coding of diagnostic information (hex)
1. Check sensor cable and sensor 2. Perform Heartbeat Verification 3. Replace sensor cable or sensor
0x80002DE
Remedy instructions
1. Insert T-DAT 2. Replace T-DAT
Coding of diagnostic information (hex)
0x100016D
157
Diagnostics and troubleshooting
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
No. 383 Memory content
Diagnostic information Short text
Status signal Diagnostic behavior
F Alarm
Remedy instructions
1. Restart device 2. Delete T-DAT via 'Reset device'
parameter 3. Replace T-DAT
Coding of diagnostic information (hex)
0x100016E
Diagnostic information
No.
Short text
387 HistoROM backup failed
Status signal Diagnostic behavior
F Alarm
Remedy instructions Contact service organization
Coding of diagnostic information (hex)
0x1000288
Diagnostic information
No.
Short text
512 Sensor electronic (ISEM) faulty
Status signal Diagnostic behavior
F Alarm
Remedy instructions
1. Check ECC recovery time 2. Turn off ECC
Coding of diagnostic information (hex)
0x1000120
12.8.3 Diagnostic of configuration
Diagnostic information
No.
Short text
303 I/O 1 to n configuration changed
Status signal Diagnostic behavior
M Warning
Remedy instructions
Coding of diagnostic information (hex)
1. Apply I/O module configuration (parameter 'Apply I/O configuration')
2. Afterwards reload device description and check wiring
0x400026C
No. 330 Flash file invalid
Diagnostic information Short text
Status signal Diagnostic behavior
M Warning
Remedy instructions
1. Update firmware of device 2. Restart device
Coding of diagnostic information (hex)
0x40002C9
Diagnostic information
No.
Short text
331 Firmware update failed
Status signal Diagnostic behavior
F Warning
Remedy instructions
1. Update firmware of device 2. Restart device
Coding of diagnostic information (hex)
0x10002CA
158
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
No. 410 Data transfer
Diagnostic information Short text
Status signal Diagnostic behavior
F Alarm
Diagnostic information
No.
Short text
412 Processing download
Status signal Diagnostic behavior
C Warning
No. 431 Trim 1 to n
Diagnostic information Short text
Status signal Diagnostic behavior
C Warning
Diagnostic information
No.
Short text
437 Configuration incompatible
Status signal Diagnostic behavior
F Alarm
No. 438 Dataset
Diagnostic information Short text
Status signal Diagnostic behavior
M Warning
Diagnostic information
No.
Short text
441 Current output 1 to n
Status signal Diagnostic behavior
S Warning
Diagnostics and troubleshooting
Remedy instructions
1. Check connection 2. Retry data transfer
Coding of diagnostic information (hex)
0x100008B
Remedy instructions Download active, please wait
Coding of diagnostic information (hex)
0x2000204
Remedy instructions Carry out trim
Coding of diagnostic information (hex)
0x2000004
Remedy instructions
1. Restart device 2. Contact service
Coding of diagnostic information (hex)
0x1000060
Remedy instructions
1. Check data set file 2. Check device configuration 3. Up- and download new
configuration
Coding of diagnostic information (hex)
0x400006A
Remedy instructions
1. Check process 2. Check current output settings
Coding of diagnostic information (hex)
� 0x8000099 � 0x80000B6
Endress+Hauser
159
Diagnostics and troubleshooting
Diagnostic information
No.
Short text
442 Frequency output 1 to n
Status signal Diagnostic behavior
S Warning
No. 443 Pulse output 1 to n
Diagnostic information Short text
Status signal Diagnostic behavior
S Warning
Diagnostic information
No.
Short text
444 Current input 1 to n
Status signal Diagnostic behavior
S Warning
No. 453 Flow override
Diagnostic information Short text
Status signal Diagnostic behavior
C Warning
Diagnostic information
No.
Short text
484 Failure mode simulation
Status signal Diagnostic behavior
C Alarm
Diagnostic information
No.
Short text
485 Measured variable simulation
Status signal Diagnostic behavior
C Warning
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Remedy instructions
Coding of diagnostic information (hex)
1. Check process
� 0x800008A
2. Check frequency output settings � 0x8000122
Remedy instructions
1. Check process 2. Check pulse output settings
Coding of diagnostic information (hex)
� 0x800008C � 0x8000121
Remedy instructions
1. Check process 2. Check current input settings
Coding of diagnostic information (hex)
0x80001EB
Remedy instructions Deactivate flow override
Coding of diagnostic information (hex)
0x2000094
Remedy instructions Deactivate simulation
Coding of diagnostic information (hex)
0x2000090
Remedy instructions Deactivate simulation
Coding of diagnostic information (hex)
0x2000093
160
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Diagnostic information
No.
Short text
486 Current input 1 to n simulation
Status signal Diagnostic behavior
C Warning
Diagnostic information
No.
Short text
491 Current output 1 to n simulation
Status signal Diagnostic behavior
C Warning
Diagnostic information
No.
Short text
492 Simulation frequency output 1 to n
Status signal Diagnostic behavior
C Warning
Diagnostic information
No.
Short text
493 Simulation pulse output 1 to n
Status signal Diagnostic behavior
C Warning
Diagnostic information
No.
Short text
494 Switch output simulation 1 to n
Status signal Diagnostic behavior
C Warning
Diagnostic information
No.
Short text
495 Diagnostic event simulation
Status signal Diagnostic behavior
C Warning
Diagnostics and troubleshooting
Remedy instructions Deactivate simulation
Coding of diagnostic information (hex)
0x20001EC
Remedy instructions Deactivate simulation
Coding of diagnostic information (hex)
0x200000E
Remedy instructions
Deactivate simulation frequency output
Coding of diagnostic information (hex)
0x200008D
Remedy instructions
Coding of diagnostic information (hex)
Deactivate simulation pulse output 0x200008E
Remedy instructions
Coding of diagnostic information (hex)
Deactivate simulation switch output 0x200008F
Remedy instructions Deactivate simulation
Coding of diagnostic information (hex)
0x200015E
Endress+Hauser
161
Diagnostics and troubleshooting
Diagnostic information
No.
Short text
496 Status input simulation
Status signal Diagnostic behavior
C Warning
Diagnostic information
No.
Short text
511 ISEM settings faulty
Status signal Diagnostic behavior
C Alarm
Diagnostic information
No.
Short text
520 I/O 1 to n hardware configuration invalid
Status signal Diagnostic behavior
F Alarm
Diagnostic information
No.
Short text
530 Electrode cleaning is running
Status signal Diagnostic behavior
C Warning
Diagnostic information
No.
Short text
531 Empty pipe adjustment faulty
Status signal Diagnostic behavior [from the factory] 1)
S Warning
1) Diagnostic behavior can be changed.
No. 537 Configuration
Diagnostic information Short text
Status signal Diagnostic behavior
F Warning
162
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Remedy instructions
Coding of diagnostic information (hex)
Deactivate simulation status input 0x2000170
Remedy instructions
1. Check measuring period and integration time
2. Check sensor properties
Coding of diagnostic information (hex)
0x200031C
Remedy instructions
Coding of diagnostic information (hex)
1. Check I/O hardware configuration
2. Replace wrong I/O module 3. Plug the module of double pulse
output on correct slot
0x1000276
Remedy instructions Turn off ECC
Coding of diagnostic information (hex)
0x200015A
Remedy instructions Execute EPD adjustment
Coding of diagnostic information (hex)
0x800016B
Remedy instructions
1. Check IP addresses in network 2. Change IP address
Coding of diagnostic information (hex)
0x100014A
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Diagnostics and troubleshooting
Diagnostic information
No.
Short text
594 Relay output simulation
Status signal Diagnostic behavior
C Warning
Remedy instructions
Coding of diagnostic information (hex)
Deactivate simulation switch output 0x20002BA
12.8.4 Diagnostic of process
No. 803 Current loop
Diagnostic information Short text
Status signal Diagnostic behavior
F Alarm
Remedy instructions
1. Check wiring 2. Change I/O module
Coding of diagnostic information (hex)
0x10000AD
Diagnostic information
No.
Short text
832 Electronic temperature too high
Status signal Diagnostic behavior [from the factory] 1)
S Warning
1) Diagnostic behavior can be changed.
Diagnostic information
No.
Short text
833 Electronic temperature too low
Status signal Diagnostic behavior [from the factory] 1)
S Warning
1) Diagnostic behavior can be changed.
Diagnostic information
No.
Short text
834 Process temperature too high
Status signal Diagnostic behavior [from the factory] 1)
S Warning
1) Diagnostic behavior can be changed.
Remedy instructions Reduce ambient temperature
Coding of diagnostic information (hex)
� 0x80000C3 � 0x80002D4
Remedy instructions Increase ambient temperature
Coding of diagnostic information (hex)
� 0x80000C1 � 0x80002D3
Remedy instructions Reduce process temperature
Coding of diagnostic information (hex)
0x80000C5
Endress+Hauser
163
Diagnostics and troubleshooting
Diagnostic information
No.
Short text
835 Process temperature too low
Status signal Diagnostic behavior [from the factory] 1)
S Warning
1) Diagnostic behavior can be changed.
No. 842 Process limit
Diagnostic information Short text
Status signal Diagnostic behavior
S Warning
No. 882 Input signal
Diagnostic information Short text
Status signal Diagnostic behavior
F Alarm
No. 937 Sensor symmetry
Diagnostic information Short text
Status signal Diagnostic behavior [from the factory] 1)
S Warning
1) Diagnostic behavior can be changed.
No. 938 EMC interference
Diagnostic information Short text
Status signal Diagnostic behavior [from the factory] 1)
F Alarm
1) Diagnostic behavior can be changed.
Diagnostic information
No.
Short text
961 Electrode potential out of specification
Status signal Diagnostic behavior
S Warning
164
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Remedy instructions Increase process temperature
Coding of diagnostic information (hex)
0x80000C6
Remedy instructions
Low flow cut off active! 1. Check low flow cut off
configuration
Coding of diagnostic information (hex)
0x8000091
Remedy instructions
Coding of diagnostic information (hex)
1. Check input configuration 2. Check external device or process
conditions
0x1000031
Remedy instructions
Coding of diagnostic information (hex)
1. Eliminate external magnetic field 0x8000154 near sensor
2. Turn off diagnostic message
Remedy instructions
1. Check ambient conditions regarding EMC influence
2. Turn off diagnostic message
Coding of diagnostic information (hex)
0x100011B
Remedy instructions
1. Check process conditions 2. Check ambient conditions
Coding of diagnostic information (hex)
0x8000155
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Diagnostics and troubleshooting
No. 962 Pipe empty
Diagnostic information Short text
Status signal Diagnostic behavior [from the factory] 1)
S Warning
1) Diagnostic behavior can be changed.
Remedy instructions
Coding of diagnostic information (hex)
1. Perform full pipe adjustment 2. Perform empty pipe adjustment 3. Turn off empty pipe detection
0x8000092
12.9 Pending diagnostic events
The Diagnostics menu allows the user to view the current diagnostic event and the previous diagnostic event separately.
To call up the measures to rectify a diagnostic event: � Via local display 149 � Via Web browser 150 � Via "FieldCare" operating tool 151 � Via "DeviceCare" operating tool 151 Other pending diagnostic events can be displayed in the Diagnostic list submenu 166
Navigation "Diagnostics" menu
Diagnostics
Actual diagnostics Previous diagnostics Operating time from restart Operating time
165 165 166 166
Parameter Actual diagnostics
Previous diagnostics
Parameter overview with brief description
Prerequisite A diagnostic event has occurred.
Two diagnostic events have already occurred.
Description
User interface
Shows the current occured diagnostic event along with its diagnostic information.
If two or more messages occur simultaneously, the message with the highest priority is shown on the display.
Symbol for diagnostic behavior, diagnostic code and short message.
Shows the diagnostic event that occurred prior to the current diagnostic event along with its diagnostic information.
Symbol for diagnostic behavior, diagnostic code and short message.
Endress+Hauser
165
Diagnostics and troubleshooting
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Parameter Operating time from restart Operating time
166
Prerequisite �
�
Description
User interface
Shows the time the device has been in operation since the last device restart.
Days (d), hours (h), minutes (m) and seconds (s)
Indicates how long the device has been in operation.
Days (d), hours (h), minutes (m) and seconds (s)
12.10 Diagnostic list
Up to 5 currently pending diagnostic events can be displayed in the Diagnostic list submenu along with the associated diagnostic information. If more than 5 diagnostic events are pending, the events with the highest priority are shown on the display. Navigation path Diagnostics Diagnostic list
/ ../Diagnose list Diagnostics
F273 Main electronic Diagnostics 2 Diagnostics 3
30 Taking the example of the local display
To call up the measures to rectify a diagnostic event: � Via local display 149 � Via Web browser 150 � Via "FieldCare" operating tool 151 � Via "DeviceCare" operating tool 151
A0014006-EN
12.11 Event logbook
12.11.1 Reading out the event logbook
A chronological overview of the event messages that have occurred is provided in the Events list submenu. Navigation path Diagnostics menu Event logbook submenu Event list
/ ../Eventlist
F
I1091 Config. change
I1157 Mem.err. ev.list
0d01h19m10s
F311 Electr. failure
31 Taking the example of the local display
A0014008-EN
� A maximum of 20 event messages can be displayed in chronological order. � If the Extended HistoROM application package (order option) is enabled in the device,
the event list can contain up to 100 entries . The event history includes entries for: � Diagnostic events 153 � Information events 167
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Diagnostics and troubleshooting
In addition to the operation time of its occurrence, each event is also assigned a symbol that indicates whether the event has occurred or is ended: � Diagnostic event
� : Occurrence of the event � : End of the event � Information event : Occurrence of the event
To call up the measures to rectify a diagnostic event: � Via local display 149 � Via Web browser 150 � Via "FieldCare" operating tool 151 � Via "DeviceCare" operating tool 151 For filtering the displayed event messages 167
12.11.2 Filtering the event logbook
Using the Filter options parameter you can define which category of event message is displayed in the Events list submenu. Navigation path Diagnostics Event logbook Filter options Filter categories � All � Failure (F) � Function check (C) � Out of specification (S) � Maintenance required (M) � Information (I)
12.11.3 Overview of information events
Unlike a diagnostic event, an information event is displayed in the event logbook only and not in the diagnostic list.
Info number I1000 I1079 I1089 I1090 I1091 I1092 I1137 I1151 I1155 I1156 I1157 I1184 I1256 I1278 I1335 I1351
Info name --------(Device ok) Sensor changed Power on Configuration reset Configuration changed HistoROM backup deleted Electronic changed History reset Reset electronic temperature Memory error trend Memory error event list Display connected Display: access status changed I/O module reset detected Firmware changed Empty pipe detection adjustment failure
Endress+Hauser
167
Diagnostics and troubleshooting
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Info number I1353 I1361 I1397 I1398 I1443 I1444 I1445 I1457 I1459 I1461 I1462 I1512 I1513 I1514 I1515 I1618 I1619 I1621 I1622 I1624 I1625 I1626 I1627 I1628 I1629 I1631 I1632 I1633 I1634 I1635 I1639 I1649 I1650 I1712 I1725 I1726
Info name Empty pipe detection adjustment ok Web server: login failed Fieldbus: access status changed CDI: access status changed Coating thickness not determined Device verification passed Device verification failed Measured error verification failed I/O module verification failed Sensor verification failed Sensor electronic module verific. failed Download started Download finished Upload started Upload finished I/O module 2 replaced I/O module 3 replaced I/O module 4 replaced Calibration changed Reset all totalizers Write protection activated Write protection deactivated Web server: login successful Display: login successful CDI: login successful Web server access changed Display: login failed CDI: login failed Reset to factory settings Reset to delivery settings Max. switch cycles number reached Hardware write protection activated Hardware write protection deactivated New flash file received Sensor electronic module (ISEM) changed Configuration backup failed
12.12 Resetting the measuring device
Using theDevice reset parameter ( 127) it is possible to reset the entire device configuration or some of the configuration to a defined state.
168
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Diagnostics and troubleshooting
12.12.1 Function scope of the "Device reset" parameter
Options Cancel To delivery settings
Restart device
Restore S-DAT backup
Description
No action is executed and the user exits the parameter.
Every parameter for which a customer-specific default setting was ordered is reset to this customer-specific value. All other parameters are reset to the factory setting.
The restart resets every parameter whose data are in the volatile memory (RAM) to the factory setting (e.g. measured value data). The device configuration remains unchanged.
Restore the data that are saved on the S-DAT. The data record is restored from the electronics memory to the S-DAT.
This option is displayed only in an alarm condition.
12.13 Device information
The Device information submenu contains all parameters that display different information for device identification.
Navigation "Diagnostics" menu Device information
Device information
Device tag Serial number Firmware version Device name Order code Extended order code 1 Extended order code 2 Extended order code 3 ENP version
170 170 170 170 170 170 170 170 170
Endress+Hauser
169
Diagnostics and troubleshooting
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Parameter Device tag Serial number Firmware version Device name Order code Extended order code 1
Extended order code 2
Extended order code 3
ENP version
Parameter overview with brief description
Description
User interface
Shows name of measuring point.
Max. 32 characters, such as letters, numbers or special characters (e.g. @, %, /).
Shows the serial number of the measuring device.
Max. 11-digit character string comprising letters and numbers.
Shows the device firmware version installed. Character string in the format xx.yy.zz
Shows the name of the transmitter.
The name can be found on the nameplate of the transmitter.
Promag 300/500
Shows the device order code.
The order code can be found on the nameplate of the sensor and transmitter in the "Order code" field.
Character string composed of letters, numbers and certain punctuation marks (e.g. /).
Shows the 1st part of the extended order code.
The extended order code can also be found on the nameplate of the sensor and transmitter in the "Ext. ord. cd." field.
Character string
Shows the 2nd part of the extended order code.
The extended order code can also be found on the nameplate of the sensor and transmitter in the "Ext. ord. cd." field.
Character string
Shows the 3rd part of the extended order code.
The extended order code can also be found on the nameplate of the sensor and transmitter in the "Ext. ord. cd." field.
Character string
Shows the version of the electronic nameplate (ENP).
Character string
Factory setting Promag � � � � �
�
�
2.02.00
170
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Diagnostics and troubleshooting
12.14 Firmware history
Release date
Firmware version
Order code for
"Firmware version"
Firmware changes
10.2017 01.00.zz Option 77 Original firmware
Documentation type
Operating Instructions
Documentation
It is possible to flash the firmware to the current version or the previous version using the service interface. For the compatibility of the firmware version with the previous version, the installed device description files and operating tools, observe the information about the device in the "Manufacturer's information" document. The manufacturer's information is available: � In the Download Area of the Endress+Hauser web site: www.endress.com
Downloads � Specify the following details:
� Product root: e.g. 5W3B The product root is the first part of the order code: see the nameplate on the device.
� Text search: Manufacturer's information � Media type: Documentation � Technical Documentation
Endress+Hauser
171
Maintenance
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
13 Maintenance
13.1 Maintenance tasks
No special maintenance work is required.
13.1.1 Exterior cleaning
When cleaning the exterior of measuring devices, always use cleaning agents that do not attack the surface of the housing or the seals. LWARNING Cleaning agents can damage the plastic transmitter housing!
Do not use high-pressure steam. Only use the permitted cleaning agents specified.
Permitted cleaning agents for the plastic transmitter housing � Commercially available household cleaners � Methyl alcohol or isopropyl alcohol � Mild soap solutions
13.1.2 Interior cleaning
No interior cleaning is planned for the device.
13.1.3 Replacing seals
The sensor's seals (particularly aseptic molded seals) must be replaced periodically. The interval between changes depends on the frequency of the cleaning cycles, the cleaning temperature and the medium temperature. Replacement seals (accessory part) 210
13.2 Measuring and test equipment
Endress+Hauser offers a wide variety of measuring and test equipment, such as W@M or device tests.
Your Endress+Hauser Sales Center can provide detailed information on the services. List of some of the measuring and testing equipment: 175
13.3 Endress+Hauser services
Endress+Hauser offers a wide variety of services for maintenance such as recalibration, maintenance service or device tests.
Your Endress+Hauser Sales Center can provide detailed information on the services.
172
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Repair
14 Repair
14.1 General notes
14.1.1 Repair and conversion concept
The Endress+Hauser repair and conversion concept provides for the following: � The measuring devices have a modular design. � Spare parts are grouped into logical kits with the associated Installation Instructions. � Repairs are carried out by Endress+Hauser Service or by appropriately trained customers. � Certified devices can only be converted to other certified devices by Endress+Hauser
Service or at the factory.
14.1.2 Notes for repair and conversion
For repair and modification of a measuring device, observe the following notes:
Use only original Endress+Hauser spare parts. Carry out the repair according to the Installation Instructions. Observe the applicable standards, federal/national regulations, Ex documentation (XA)
and certificates.
Document every repair and each conversion and enter them into the W@M life cycle
management database.
14.2 Spare parts
Measuring device serial number: Can be read out via the Serial number parameter ( 170) in the Device information submenu.
14.3 Endress+Hauser services
Endress+Hauser offers a wide range of services. Your Endress+Hauser Sales Center can provide detailed information on the services.
14.4 Return
The requirements for safe device return can vary depending on the device type and national legislation. 1. Refer to the website for more information:
http://www.endress.com/support/return-material 2. Return the device if repairs or a factory calibration are required, or if the wrong
device was ordered or delivered.
14.5 Disposal
14.5.1 Removing the measuring device
1. Switch off the device.
Endress+Hauser
173
Repair
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
LWARNING Danger to persons from process conditions. Beware of hazardous process conditions such as pressure in the measuring device, high
temperatures or aggressive fluids. 2. Carry out the mounting and connection steps from the "Mounting the measuring
device" and "Connecting the measuring device" sections in reverse order. Observe the safety instructions.
14.5.2 Disposing of the measuring device LWARNING
Danger to personnel and environment from fluids that are hazardous to health.
Ensure that the measuring device and all cavities are free of fluid residues that are
hazardous to health or the environment, e.g. substances that have permeated into crevices or diffused through plastic. Observe the following notes during disposal:
Observe valid federal/national regulations. Ensure proper separation and reuse of the device components.
174
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Accessories
Endress+Hauser
15 Accessories
Various accessories, which can be ordered with the device or subsequently from Endress +Hauser, are available for the device. Detailed information on the order code in question is available from your local Endress+Hauser sales center or on the product page of the Endress+Hauser website: www.endress.com.
15.1 Device-specific accessories
15.1.1 For the transmitter
Accessories Proline 300 transmitter
Description
Transmitter for replacement or storage. Use the order code to define the following specifications: � Approvals � Output � Input � Display/operation � Housing � Software
Order code: 5X3BXX
Installation Instructions EA01263D
Remote display and operating module DKX001
� If ordered directly with the measuring device: Order code for "Display; operation", option O "Remote display 4-line illum.; 10 m (30 ft) Cable; touch control"
� If ordered separately: � Measuring device: order code for "Display; operation", option M "W/o, prepared for remote display" � DKX001: Via the separate product structure DKX001
� If ordered subsequently: DKX001: Via the separate product structure DKX001
Mounting bracket for DKX001 � If ordered directly: order code for "Accessory enclosed", option RA "Mounting
bracket, pipe 1/2"" � If ordered subsequently: order number: 71340960
Connecting cable (replacement cable) Via the separate product structure: DKX002
Further information on display and operating module DKX001 204.
Special Documentation SD01763D
External WLAN antenna
External WLAN antenna with 1.5 m (59.1 in) connecting cable and two angle brackets. Order code for "Accessory enclosed", option P8 "Wireless antenna wide area".
� The external WLAN antenna is not suitable for use in hygienic applications. � Further information on the WLAN interface 78.
Order number: 71351317
Installation Instructions EA01238D
Protective cover
Is used to protect the measuring device from the effects of the weather: e.g. rainwater, excess heating from direct sunlight.
Order number: 71343505
Installation Instructions EA01160D
Ground cable
Set, consisting of two ground cables for potential equalization.
175
Accessories 176
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
15.1.2 For the sensor
Accessories Ground disks
Description
Are used to ground the medium in lined measuring tubes to ensure proper measurement.
For details, see Installation Instructions EA00070D
15.2 Communication-specific accessories
Accessories Fieldgate FXA42 Field Xpert SMT70
Field Xpert SMT77
Description
Is used to transmit the measured values of connected 4 to 20 mA analog measuring devices, as well as digital measuring devices
� Technical Information TI01297S � Operating Instructions BA01778S � Product page: www.endress.com/fxa42
The Field Xpert SMT70 tablet PC for device configuration enables mobile plant asset management in hazardous and non-hazardous areas. It is suitable for commissioning and maintenance staff to manage field instruments with a digital communication interface and to record progress. This tablet PC is designed as an all-in-one solution with a preinstalled driver library and is an easy-to-use, touch-sensitive tool which can be used to manage field instruments throughout their entire life cycle.
� Technical Information TI01342S � Operating Instructions BA01709S � Product page: www.endress.com/smt70
The Field Xpert SMT77 tablet PC for device configuration enables mobile plant asset management in areas categorized as Ex Zone 1.
� Technical Information TI01418S � Operating Instructions BA01923S � Product page: www.endress.com/smt77
15.3 Service-specific accessories
Accessories Applicator
W@M
Description
Software for selecting and sizing Endress+Hauser measuring devices: � Choice of measuring devices for industrial requirements � Calculation of all the necessary data for identifying the optimum flowmeter:
e.g. nominal diameter, pressure loss, flow velocity and accuracy. � Graphic illustration of the calculation results � Determination of the partial order code, administration, documentation and
access to all project-related data and parameters over the entire life cycle of a project.
Applicator is available: � Via the Internet: https://portal.endress.com/webapp/applicator � As a downloadable DVD for local PC installation.
W@M Life Cycle Management Improved productivity with information at your fingertips. Data relevant to a plant and its components is generated from the first stages of planning and during the asset's complete life cycle. W@M Life Cycle Management is an open and flexible information platform with online and on-site tools. Instant access for your staff to current, in-depth data shortens your plant's engineering time, speeds up procurement processes and increases plant uptime. Combined with the right services, W@M Life Cycle Management boosts productivity in every phase. For more information, visit www.endress.com/lifecyclemanagement
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Accessories
Accessories FieldCare
DeviceCare
Description
FDT-based plant asset management tool from Endress+Hauser. It can configure all smart field units in your system and helps you manage them. By using the status information, it is also a simple but effective way of checking their status and condition.
Operating Instructions BA00027S and BA00059S
Tool to connect and configure Endress+Hauser field devices.
Innovation brochure IN01047S
15.4 System components
Accessories Memograph M graphic data manager
iTEMP
Description
The Memograph M graphic data manager provides information on all the relevant measured variables. Measured values are recorded correctly, limit values are monitored and measuring points analyzed. The data are stored in the 256 MB internal memory and also on a SD card or USB stick.
� Technical Information TI00133R � Operating Instructions BA00247R
The temperature transmitters can be used in all applications and are suitable for the measurement of gases, steam and liquids. They can be used to read in the medium temperature.
"Fields of Activity" document FA00006T
Endress+Hauser
177
Technical data
Measuring principle Measuring system Measured variable Measuring range
178
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
16 Technical data
16.1 Application
The measuring device is only suitable for flow measurement of liquids with a minimum conductivity of 5 �S/cm. Depending on the version ordered, the measuring device can also measure potentially explosive, flammable, poisonous and oxidizing media. To ensure that the device remains in proper operating condition for its service life, use the measuring device only for media against which the process-wetted materials are sufficiently resistant.
16.2 Function and system design
Electromagnetic flow measurement on the basis of Faraday's law of magnetic induction.
The device consists of a transmitter and a sensor. The device is available as a compact version: The transmitter and sensor form a mechanical unit. For information on the structure of the device 14
16.3 Input
Direct measured variables � Volume flow (proportional to induced voltage) � Electrical conductivity
Calculated measured variables Mass flow
Typically v = 0.01 to 10 m/s (0.03 to 33 ft/s) with the specified accuracy Electrical conductivity: 5 S/cm for liquids in general
Flow characteristic values in SI units: DN 25 to 125 (1 to 4")
Nominal diameter
[mm]
[in]
25
1
32
�
40
1 �
50
2
65
�
80
3
Recommended flow
min./max. full scale value
(v ~ 0.3/10 m/s)
[dm3/min]
9 to 300
15 to 500
25 to 700
35 to 1 100
60 to 2 000
90 to 3 000
Full scale value current output (v ~ 2.5 m/s)
[dm3/min]
75
125
200
300
500
750
Factory settings
Pulse value (~ 2 pulse/s)
[dm3] 0.5 1 1.5 2.5 5 5
Low flow cut off (v ~ 0.04 m/s)
[dm3/min] 1 2 3 5 8 12
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Technical data
Endress+Hauser
Nominal diameter
[mm]
[in]
100
4
125
�
Recommended flow
min./max. full scale value
(v ~ 0.3/10 m/s)
[dm3/min]
145 to 4 700
220 to 7 500
Full scale value current output (v ~ 2.5 m/s)
[dm3/min]
1200
1850
Factory settings
Pulse value (~ 2 pulse/s)
[dm3] 10 15
Low flow cut off (v ~ 0.04 m/s)
[dm3/min] 20 30
Flow characteristic values in SI units: DN 150 to 2400 (6 to 90")
Nominal diameter
[mm]
[in]
150
6
200
8
250
10
300
12
350
14
375
15
400
16
450
18
500
20
600
24
700
28
750
30
800
32
900
36
1000
40
�
42
1200
48
�
54
1400
�
�
60
1600
�
�
66
1800
72
�
78
2000
�
�
84
2200
�
�
90
2400
�
Recommended flow
min./max. full scale value (v ~ 0.3/10 m/s)
[m3/h] 20 to 600 35 to 1 100 55 to 1 700 80 to 2 400 110 to 3 300 140 to 4 200 140 to 4 200 180 to 5 400 220 to 6 600 310 to 9 600 420 to 13 500 480 to 15 000 550 to 18 000 690 to 22 500 850 to 28 000 950 to 30 000 1 250 to 40 000 1 550 to 50 000 1 700 to 55 000 1 950 to 60 000 2 200 to 70 000 2 500 to 80 000 2 800 to 90 000 3 300 to 100 000 3 400 to 110 000 3 700 to 125 000 4 100 to 136 000 4 300 to 143 000 4 800 to 162 000
Factory settings
Full scale value current
output (v ~ 2.5 m/s)
Pulse value (~ 2 pulse/s)
Low flow cut off (v ~
0.04 m/s)
[m3/h]
[m3]
[m3/h]
150
0.025
2.5
300
0.05
5
500
0.05
7.5
750
0.1
10
1000
0.1
15
1200
0.15
20
1200
0.15
20
1500
0.25
25
2000
0.25
30
2500
0.3
40
3500
0.5
50
4000
0.5
60
4500
0.75
75
6000
0.75
100
7000
1
125
8000
1
125
10000
1.5
150
13000
1.5
200
14000
2
225
16000
2
250
18000
2.5
300
20500
2.5
325
23000
3
350
28500
3.5
450
28500
3.5
450
31000
4.5
500
34000
4.5
540
36000
5
570
40000
5.5
650
179
Technical data 180
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Flow characteristic values in SI units: DN 50 to 300 (2 to 12") for order code for "Design", option C "Fixed flange, without inlet/outlet runs"
Nominal diameter
[mm] [in]
50
2
65
�
80
3
100
4
125
�
150
6
200
8
250
10
300
12
Recommended flow
min./max. full scale value (v ~ 0.12/5 m/s)
[m3/h] 15 to 600 dm3/min 25 to 1 000 dm3/min 35 to 1 500 dm3/min 60 to 2 400 dm3/min 90 to 3 700 dm3/min 145 to 5 400 dm3/min 220 to 9 400 dm3/min
20 to 850 35 to 1 300
Factory settings
Full scale value current output
(v ~ 2.5 m/s) [m3/h]
300 dm3/min 500 dm3/min 750 dm3/min 1 200 dm3/min 1 850 dm3/min 2 500 dm3/min 5 000 dm3/min
500 750
Pulse value Low flow cut off (~ 4 pulse/s) (v ~ 0.01 m/s)
[m3] 1.25 dm3
2 dm3 3 dm3 5 dm3 8 dm3 10 dm3 20 dm3 0.03 0.05
[m3/h] 1.25 dm3/min
2 dm3/min 3.25 dm3/min 4.75 dm3/min 7.5 dm3/min 11 dm3/min 19 dm3/min
1.75 2.75
Flow characteristic values in US units: 1 to 48" (DN 25 to 1200)
Nominal diameter
[in]
[mm]
1
25
�
32
1 �
40
2
50
�
65
3
80
4
100
�
125
6
150
8
200
10
250
12
300
14
350
15
375
16
400
18
450
20
500
24
600
28
700
30
750
32
800
Recommended flow
min./max. full scale value
(v ~ 0.3/10 m/s) [gal/min] 2.5 to 80 4 to 130 7 to 185 10 to 300 16 to 500 24 to 800 40 to 1 250 60 to 1 950 90 to 2 650
155 to 4 850 250 to 7 500 350 to 10 600 500 to 15 000 600 to 19 000 600 to 19 000 800 to 24 000 1 000 to 30 000 1 400 to 44 000 1 900 to 60 000 2 150 to 67 000 2 450 to 80 000
Full scale value current output (v ~ 2.5 m/s)
[gal/min] 18 30 50 75 130 200 300 450 600
1200 1500 2400 3600 4800 4800 6000 7500 10500 13500 16500 19500
Factory settings
Pulse value (~ 2 pulse/s)
[gal] 0.2 0.2 0.5 0.5 1 2 2 5 5 10 15 25 30 50 50 50 75 100 125 150 200
Low flow cut off (v ~ 0.04 m/s)
[gal/min] 0.25 0.5 0.75 1.25 2 2.5 4 7 12 15 30 45 60 60 60 90 120 180 210 270 300
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Technical data
Nominal diameter
[in]
[mm]
36
900
40
1000
42
�
48
1200
Recommended flow
min./max. full scale value
(v ~ 0.3/10 m/s)
[gal/min]
3 100 to 100 000
3 800 to 125 000
4 200 to 135 000
5 500 to 175 000
Full scale value current output (v ~ 2.5 m/s)
[gal/min]
24000
30000
33000
42000
Factory settings
Pulse value (~ 2 pulse/s)
[gal] 225 250 250 400
Low flow cut off (v ~ 0.04 m/s)
[gal/min] 360 480 600 600
Flow characteristic values in US units: 54 to 90" (DN 1400 to 2400)
Nominal diameter
[in]
[mm]
54
�
�
1400
60
�
�
1600
66
�
72
1800
78
�
�
2000
84
�
�
2200
90
�
�
2400
Recommended flow
min./max. full scale value
(v ~ 0.3/10 m/s) [Mgal/d] 9 to 300 10 to 340 12 to 380 13 to 450 14 to 500 16 to 570 18 to 650 20 to 700 24 to 800 26 to 870 27 to 910 31 to 1 030
Full scale value current output (v ~ 2.5 m/s)
[Mgal/d] 75 85 95 110 120 140 175 175 190 210 220 245
Factory settings
Pulse value (~ 2 pulse/s)
[Mgal] 0.0005 0.0005 0.0005 0.0008 0.0008 0.0008 0.0010 0.0010 0.0011 0.0012 0.0013 0.0014
Low flow cut off (v ~ 0.04 m/s)
[Mgal/d] 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.7 2.2 2.6 3.0 2.9 3.2 3.4 3.6 4.1
Flow characteristic values in US units: 2 to 12" (DN 50 to 300) for order code for "Design", option C "Fixed flange, without inlet/outlet runs"
Nominal diameter
Recommended flow
min./max. full scale value (v ~ 0.12/5 m/s)
[in] [mm]
2
50
�
65
3
80
4
100
�
125
6
150
8
200
[gal/min] 4 to 160 7 to 260 10 to 400 16 to 650 24 to 1 000 40 to 1 400 60 to 2 500
Factory settings
Full scale value current output
(v ~ 2.5 m/s) [gal/min]
75
130
200
300
450
600
1 200
Pulse value Low flow cut off (~ 4 pulse/s) (v ~ 0.01 m/s)
[gal] 0.3 0.5 0.8 1.2 1.8 2.5 5
[gal/min] 0.35 0.6 0.8 1.25 2 3 5
Endress+Hauser
181
Technical data
Operable flow range Input signal
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Nominal diameter
Recommended flow
min./max. full scale value (v ~ 0.12/5 m/s)
[in] [mm]
10
250
12
300
[gal/min] 90 to 3 700 155 to 5 700
Factory settings
Full scale value current output
(v ~ 2.5 m/s)
[gal/min]
1 500
2 400
Pulse value Low flow cut off (~ 4 pulse/s) (v ~ 0.01 m/s)
[gal] 6 9
[gal/min] 8 12
Recommended measuring range Flow limit 194
Over 1000 : 1
External measured values To increase the accuracy of certain measured variables or to calculate the mass flow, the automation system can continuously write different measured values to the measuring device: � Medium temperature enables temperature-compensated conductivity measurement (e.g.
iTEMP) � Reference density for calculating the mass flow
Various pressure transmitters and temperature measuring devices can be ordered from Endress+Hauser: see "Accessories" section 177 It is recommended to read in external measured values to calculate the corrected volume flow.
Current input The measured values are written from the automation system to the measuring device via the current input 182.
Digital communication The measured values are written from the automation system to the measuring device via EtherNet/IP.
Current input 0/4 to 20 mA
Current input Current span
Resolution Voltage drop Maximum input voltage Open-circuit voltage Possible input variables
0/4 to 20 mA (active/passive)
� 4 to 20 mA (active) � 0/4 to 20 mA (passive)
1 �A
Typically: 0.6 to 2 V for 3.6 to 22 mA (passive)
30 V (passive)
28.8 V (active)
� Temperature � Density
182
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Status input
Maximum input values Response time Input signal level Assignable functions
� DC �3 to 30 V � If status input is active (ON): Ri >3 k
Configurable: 5 to 200 ms
� Low signal: DC �3 to +5 V � High signal: DC 12 to 30 V
� Off � Reset the individual totalizers separately � Reset all totalizers � Flow override
Technical data
Endress+Hauser
183
Technical data Output signal
184
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
16.4 Output
EtherNet/IP
Standards
In accordance with IEEE 802.3
Current output 4 to 20 mA
Signal mode
Current range
Maximum output values Open-circuit voltage Maximum input voltage Load Resolution Damping Assignable measured variables
Can be set to: � Active � Passive
Can be set to: � 4 to 20 mA NAMUR � 4 to 20 mA US � 4 to 20 mA � 0 to 20 mA (only with signal mode active) � Fixed current value
22.5 mA
DC 28.8 V (active)
DC 30 V (passive)
0 to 700
0.38 �A
Configurable: 0 to 999 s
� Volume flow � Mass flow � Corrected volume flow � Flow velocity � Conductivity � Electronics temperature
Current output 4 to 20 mA Ex i passive
Order code
Signal mode Current range
Maximum output values Maximum input voltage Load Resolution Damping Assignable measured variables
"Output; Input 2" (21), "Output; Input 3" (022): Option C: current output 4 to 20 mA Ex i passive
Passive
Can be set to: � 4 to 20 mA NAMUR � 4 to 20 mA US � 4 to 20 mA � Fixed current value
22.5 mA
DC 30 V
0 to 700
0.38 �A
Configurable: 0 to 999 s
� Volume flow � Mass flow � Corrected volume flow � Flow velocity � Conductivity � Electronics temperature
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Technical data
Pulse/frequency/switch output
Function Version
Can be set to pulse, frequency or switch output
Open collector
Can be set to: � Active � Passive � Passive NAMUR
Ex-i, passive
Maximum input values Open-circuit voltage Voltage drop Pulse output Maximum input values Maximum output current Open-circuit voltage Pulse width Maximum pulse rate Pulse value Assignable measured variables
Frequency output Maximum input values Maximum output current Open-circuit voltage Output frequency Damping Pulse/pause ratio Assignable measured variables
Switch output Maximum input values Open-circuit voltage Switching behavior Switching delay
DC 30 V, 250 mA (passive) DC 28.8 V (active) For 22.5 mA: DC 2 V
DC 30 V, 250 mA (passive) 22.5 mA (active) DC 28.8 V (active) Configurable: 0.05 to 2 000 ms 10 000 Impulse/s Adjustable � Volume flow � Mass flow � Corrected volume flow
DC 30 V, 250 mA (passive) 22.5 mA (active) DC 28.8 V (active) Adjustable: end value frequency 2 to 10 000 Hz (f max = 12 500 Hz) Configurable: 0 to 999 s 1:1 � Volume flow � Mass flow � Corrected volume flow � Flow velocity � Conductivity � Electronics temperature
DC 30 V, 250 mA (passive) DC 28.8 V (active) Binary, conductive or non-conductive Configurable: 0 to 100 s
Endress+Hauser
185
Technical data
Signal on alarm 186
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Number of switching cycles
Assignable functions
Unlimited
� Off � On � Diagnostic behavior � Limit value:
� Off � Volume flow � Mass flow � Corrected volume flow � Flow velocity � Conductivity � Totalizer 1-3 � Electronics temperature � Flow direction monitoring � Status � Empty pipe detection � Low flow cut off
Relay output
Function Version Switching behavior
Maximum switching capacity (passive) Assignable functions
Switch output
Relay output, galvanically isolated
Can be set to: � NO (normally open), factory setting � NC (normally closed)
� DC 30 V, 0.1 A � AC 30 V, 0.5 A
� Off � On � Diagnostic behavior � Limit value:
� Off � Volume flow � Mass flow � Corrected volume flow � Flow velocity � Conductivity � Totalizer 1-3 � Electronic temperature � Flow direction monitoring � Status � Empty pipe detection � Low flow cut off
User-configurable input/output One specific input or output is assigned to a user-configurable input/output (configurable I/O) during device commissioning. The following inputs and outputs are available for assignment: � Choice of current output: 4 to 20 mA (active), 0/4 to 20 mA (passive) � Pulse/frequency/switch output � Choice of current input: 4 to 20 mA (active), 0/4 to 20 mA (passive) � Status input
Depending on the interface, failure information is displayed as follows:
EtherNet/IP
Device diagnostics
Device condition can be read out in Input Assembly
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Technical data
Current output 0/4 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
Failure mode
Choose from: � 4 to 20 mA in accordance with NAMUR recommendation NE 43 � 4 to 20 mA in accordance with US � Min. value: 3.59 mA � Max. value: 22.5 mA � Freely definable value between: 3.59 to 22.5 mA � Actual value � Last valid value
0 to 20 mA
Failure mode
Choose from: � Maximum alarm: 22 mA � Freely definable value between: 0 to 20.5 mA
Pulse/frequency/switch output
Pulse output Failure mode
Frequency output Failure mode
Switch output Failure mode
Choose from: � Actual value � No pulses
Choose from: � Actual value � 0 Hz � Defined value (f max 2 to 12 500 Hz)
Choose from: � Current status � Open � Closed
Relay output
Failure mode
Choose from: � Current status � Open � Closed
Local display
Plain text display Backlight
With information on cause and remedial measures Red backlighting indicates a device error.
Status signal as per NAMUR recommendation NE 107
Endress+Hauser
187
Technical data
Low flow cut off Galvanic isolation Protocol-specific data
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Interface/protocol � Via digital communication:
EtherNet/IP � Via service interface
� CDI-RJ45 service interface � WLAN interface
Plain text display
With information on cause and remedial measures
Web browser
Plain text display
With information on cause and remedial measures
Light emitting diodes (LED)
Status information
Status indicated by various light emitting diodes
The following information is displayed depending on the device version: � Supply voltage active � Data transmission active � Device alarm/error has occurred � EtherNet/IP network available � EtherNet/IP connection established
Diagnostic information via light emitting diodes 145
The switch points for low flow cut off are user-selectable. The outputs are galvanically isolated from one another and from earth (PE).
Protocol
Communication type
Device profile Manufacturer ID Device type ID Baud rates Polarity Supported CIP connections Explicit connections I/O connections Configuration options for measuring device
Configuration of the EtherNet interface
� The CIP Networks Library Volume 1: Common Industrial Protocol � The CIP Networks Library Volume 2: EtherNet/IP Adaptation of CIP
� 10Base-T � 100Base-TX
Generic device (product type: 0x2B)
0x11
0x103C
Automatic �/ Mbit with half-duplex and full-duplex detection
Auto-polarity for automatic correction of crossed TxD and RxD pairs
Max. 3 connections
Max. 6 connections
Max. 6 connections (scanner)
� DIP switches on the electronics module for IP addressing � Manufacturer-specific software (FieldCare) � Add-on Profile Level 3 for Rockwell Automation control systems � Web browser � Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) integrated in the measuring device
� Speed: 10 MBit, 100 MBit, auto (factory setting) � Duplex: half-duplex, full-duplex, auto (factory setting)
188
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Technical data
Configuration of the device address
Device Level Ring (DLR) System integration
� DIP switches on the electronics module for IP addressing (last octet) � DHCP � Manufacturer-specific software (FieldCare) � Add-on Profile Level 3 for Rockwell Automation control systems � Web browser � EtherNet/IP tools, e.g. RSLinx (Rockwell Automation)
Yes
Information regarding system integration 83.
� Cyclic data transmission � Block model � Input and output groups
Terminal assignment Device plugs available
16.5 Power supply
39 39
Pin assignment, device plug 39
Supply voltage
Order code for "Power supply" Option D Option E
Option I
Terminal voltage
DC24 V
�20%
AC100 to 240 V �15...+10%
DC24 V
�20%
AC100 to 240 V �15...+10%
Frequency range
� 50/60 Hz, �4 Hz � 50/60 Hz, �4 Hz
Power consumption
Transmitter Max. 10 W (active power)
switch-on current
Max. 36 A (<5 ms) as per NAMUR Recommendation NE 21
Current consumption
Power supply failure
Electrical connection Potential equalization terminals Endress+Hauser
Transmitter � Max. 400 mA (24 V) � Max. 200 mA (110 V, 50/60 Hz; 230 V, 50/60 Hz) � Totalizers stop at the last value measured. � Depending on the device version, the configuration is retained in the device memoryor in
the pluggable data memory (HistoROM DAT). � Error messages (incl. total operated hours) are stored. 40 46 Spring-loaded terminals: Suitable for strands and strands with ferrules. Conductor cross-section 0.2 to 2.5 mm2 (24 to 12 AWG).
189
Technical data
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Cable entries Cable specification
� Cable gland: M20 � 1.5 with cable 6 to 12 mm (0.24 to 0.47 in) � Thread for cable entry:
� NPT �" � G �" � M20 � Device plug for digital communication: M12 36
16.6 Performance characteristics
Reference operating conditions
� Error limits following DIN EN 29104, in future ISO 20456 � Water, typically: +15 to +45 �C (+59 to +113 �F); 0.5 to 7 bar (73 to 101 psi) � Data as indicated in the calibration protocol � Accuracy based on accredited calibration rigs according to ISO 17025
Maximum measured error o.r. = of reading
Error limits under reference operating conditions Volume flow � �0.5 % o.r. � 1 mm/s (0.04 in/s) � Optional: �0.2 % o.r. � 2 mm/s (0.08 in/s)
Order code for "Design"
Options D, E, F, G (standard)
Options C, H, I (0 x DN)
Installation with inlet and outlet runs
max. measured error
0.5 %
0.2 %
Installation without inlet and outlet runs
max. measured error
0.5 %
not recommended
Fluctuations in the supply voltage do not have any effect within the specified range.
[%] 2.5
2.0 0.5 %
1.5 0.2 %
1.0
0.5
0
0
1
2
4
6
0
5
10
15
20
32 Maximum measured error in % o.r.
8 25
10 [m/s] v
30 32 [ft/s]
A0028974
190
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Technical data
Repeatability Influence of ambient temperature
Flat Spec For Flat Spec in the range v0.5 (v0.2) up to vmax the measured error is constant.
[%] 2.5 2.0 1.5 1.0 0.5 0
0
0 v0.5
v0.2
0.5 % 0.2 %
33 Flat Spec in % o.r.
[m/s]
v
vmax
[ft/s]
A0017051
Flat Spec flow values 0.5 %
Nominal diameter
[mm]
[in]
25 to 600
1 to 24
50 to 300 1)
2 to 12
1) Order code for "Design", option C
v0.5
[m/s]
[ft/s]
0.5
1.64
0.25
0.82
vmax
[m/s]
[ft/s]
10
32
5
16
Flat Spec flow values 0.2 %
Nominal diameter
[mm]
[in]
25 to 600
1 to 24
50 to 300 1)
2 to 12
1) Order code for "Design", option C
v0.2
[m/s]
[ft/s]
1.5
4.92
0.6
1.97
vmax
[m/s]
[ft/s]
10
32
4
13
Electrical conductivity Max. measured error not specified.
o.r. = of reading Volume flow Max. �0.1 % o.r. � 0.5 mm/s (0.02 in/s) Electrical conductivity Max. �5 % o.r.
Current output
Temperature coefficient Max. 1 A/�C
Endress+Hauser
191
Technical data
Ambient temperature range Storage temperature Degree of protection Vibration- and shockresistance
Mechanical load Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) 192
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Pulse/frequency output
Temperature coefficient No additional effect. Included in accuracy.
16.7 Installation
Chapter "Mounting requirements" 21
16.8 Environment
23
The storage temperature corresponds to the operating temperature range of the transmitter and the sensor 23. � Protect the measuring device against direct sunlight during storage in order to avoid
unacceptably high surface temperatures. � Select a storage location where moisture cannot collect in the measuring device as
fungus or bacteria infestation can damage the liner. � If protection caps or protective covers are mounted these should never be removed
before installing the measuring device.
Measuring device � As standard: IP66/67, type 4X enclosure � When housing is open: IP20, type 1 enclosure � Display module: IP20, type 1 enclosure External WLAN antenna IP67
Vibration sinusoidal, in accordance with IEC 60068-2-6 � 2 to 8.4 Hz, 3.5 mm peak � 8.4 to 2 000 Hz, 1 g peak Vibration broad-band random, according to IEC 60068-2-64 � 10 to 200 Hz, 0.003 g2/Hz � 200 to 2 000 Hz, 0.001 g2/Hz � Total: 1.54 g rms Shock half-sine, according to IEC 60068-2-27 6 ms 30 g Rough handling shocks according to IEC 60068-2-31
� Protect the transmitter housing against mechanical effects, such as shock or impact; the use of the remote version is sometimes preferable.
� Never use the transmitter housing as a ladder or climbing aid.
As per IEC/EN 61326 and NAMUR Recommendation 21 (NE 21) Details are provided in the Declaration of Conformity.
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Technical data
16.9 Process
Medium temperature range
� 0 to +80 �C (+32 to +176 �F) for hard rubber, DN 50 to 2400 (2 to 90") � �20 to +50 �C (�4 to +122 �F) for polyurethane, DN 25 to 1200 (1 to 48") � �20 to +90 �C (�4 to +194 �F) for PTFE, DN 25 to 300 (1 to 12")
1 TA [�F] [�C] 140 60
100 40 20
0 0 -20
-40 -40
-20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 [�C]
TF
0
50
100
150
200 [�F]
A0038130
TA Ambient temperature range TF Medium temperature 1 Colored area: the ambient temperature range of �10 to �40 �C (+14 to �40 �F) and the fluid temperature
range of �10 to �20 �C (+14 to �4 �F) applies to stainless flanges only
Conductivity
5 S/cm for liquids in general.
Pressure-temperature ratings
An overview of the pressure-temperature ratings for the process connections is provided in the "Technical Information" document
Pressure tightness
Liner: hard rubber
Nominal diameter
[mm] 50 ... 2400
[in] 2 ... 90
Limit values for absolute pressure in [mbar] ([psi]) for medium temperatures:
+25 �C (+77 �F)
+50 �C (+122 �F) +80 �C (+176 �F)
0 (0)
0 (0)
0 (0)
Liner: polyurethane
Nominal diameter
[mm]
[in]
25 ... 1200 1 ... 48
Limit values for absolute pressure in [mbar] ([psi]) for medium temperatures:
+25 �C (+77 �F)
+50 �C (+122 �F)
0 (0)
0 (0)
Endress+Hauser
193
Technical data Flow limit Pressure loss
194
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Liner: PTFE
Nominal diameter
[mm]
[in]
25
1
40
2
50
2
65
2 �
80
3
100
4
125
5
150
6
200
8
250
10
300
12
Limit values for absolute pressure in [mbar] ([psi]) for medium temperatures:
+25 �C (+77 �F)
+90 �C (+194 �F)
0 (0)
0 (0)
0 (0)
0 (0)
0 (0)
0 (0)
0 (0)
40 (0.58)
0 (0)
40 (0.58)
0 (0)
135 (2.0)
135 (2.0)
240 (3.5)
135 (2.0)
240 (3.5)
200 (2.9)
290 (4.2)
330 (4.8)
400 (5.8)
400 (5.8)
500 (7.3)
The diameter of the pipe and the flow rate determine the nominal diameter of the sensor. The optimum velocity of flow is between 2 to 3 m/s (6.56 to 9.84 ft/s). Also match the velocity of flow (v) to the physical properties of the fluid: � v < 2 m/s (6.56 ft/s): for abrasive fluids (e.g. potter's clay, lime milk, ore slurry) � v > 2 m/s (6.56 ft/s): for fluids producing buildup (e.g. wastewater sludge)
A necessary increase in the flow velocity can be achieved by reducing the sensor nominal diameter. For an overview of the full scale values for the measuring range, see the "Measuring range" section
� No pressure loss occurs if the sensor is installed in a pipe with the same nominal diameter.
� Pressure losses for configurations incorporating adapters according to DIN EN 545 25
[psi] [mbar] 7 500
6 450 400
5 350
4 300 250
3 200
DN50 (2")
DN65 (2�")
DN80 (3")
2 150 100
1 50
00 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 [m�/h]
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 [gal/min]
34
A0032667-EN
Pressure loss DN 50 to 80 (2 to 3") for order code for "Design", option C "fixed flange, without inlet/outlet runs"
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Technical data
System pressure Vibrations
Design, dimensions
[psi] [mbar]
13 900
12 800 11 10 700
DN125 (5")
9 600 DN100
8 7
500
(4")
6 400 5 4 300
3 200
2 1 100
0
0
0 200 400
DN150 DN200
(6")
(8")
DN250 (10")
DN300 (12")
600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 [m�/h]
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000 [gal/min]
35
A0032668-EN
Pressure loss DN 100 to 300 (4 to 12") for order code for "Design", option C "fixed flange, without inlet/ outlet runs"
24
24
16.10 Mechanical construction
For the dimensions and installation lengths of the device, see the "Technical Information" document, "Mechanical construction" section.
Endress+Hauser
195
Technical data Weight
196
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
All values (weight exclusive of packaging material) refer to devices with flanges of the standard pressure rating. The weight may be lower than indicated depending on the pressure rating and design. Weight specifications including transmitter as per order code for "Housing", option A "Aluminum, coated". Different values due to different transmitter versions: Transmitter version for the hazardous area (Order code for "Housing", option A "Aluminum, coated"; Ex d): +2 kg (+4.4 lbs)
Weight in SI units
Order code for "Design", options C, D, E DN 25 to 400, DN 1" to 16"
Nominal diameter
Reference values
EN (DIN), AS, JIS
[mm]
[in]
Pressure rating
[kg]
25
1
PN 40
10
32
�
PN 40
11
40
1 �
PN 40
12
50
2
PN 40
13
65
�
PN 16
13
80
3
PN 16
15
100
4
PN 16
18
125
�
PN 16
25
150
6
PN 16
31
200
8
PN 10
52
250
10
PN 10
81
300
12
PN 10
95
350
14
PN 6
106
375
15
PN 6
121
400
16
PN 6
121
ASME (Class 150) [kg] 5 � 7 9 � 14 19 � 33 52 90 129 172 � 203
Order code for "Design", options F DN 450 (18")
Nominal diameter
[mm] [in]
450
18
500
20
600
24
700
28
�
30
800
32
900
36
1000
40
�
42
EN (DIN) (PN16) [kg] 142 182 227 291 � 353 444 566 �
Reference values
AS (PN 16) [kg] 138 186 266 369 447 524 704 785 �
ASME (Class 150), AWWA (Class D) [kg] 191 228 302 266 318 383 470 587 670
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Technical data
Order code for "Design", options F DN 450 (18")
Nominal diameter
[mm] [in]
1200
48
�
54
1400
�
�
60
1600
�
�
66
1800
72
�
78
2000
�
�
84
2200
�
�
90
2400
�
EN (DIN) (PN16) [kg] 843 � 1 204 � 1 845 � 2 357 2 929 2 929 � 3 422 � 4 094
Reference values
AS (PN 16) [kg] 1 229 � � � � � � � � � � � �
ASME (Class 150), AWWA (Class D) [kg] 901 1 273 � 1 594 � 2 131 2 568 3 113 3 113 3 755 � 4 797 �
Order code for "Design", options G DN 450 (18")
Nominal diameter
[mm]
[in]
450
18
500
20
600
24
700
28
�
30
800
32
900
36
1000
40
�
42
1200
48
�
54
1400
�
�
60
1600
�
�
66
1800
72
�
78
2000
�
EN (DIN) (PN 6) [kg] 161 156 208 304 � 357 485 589 � 850 850 1 300 � 1 845 � 2 357 2 929 2 929
Reference values ASME (Class 150), AWWA (Class D) [kg] 255 285 405 400 460 550 800 900 1 100 1 400 2 200 � 2 700 � 3 700 4 100 4 600 �
Endress+Hauser
197
Technical data 198
Weight in US units
Order code for "Design", options C, D, E DN 25 to 400, DN 1" to 16"
Nominal diameter
[mm]
[in]
25
1
32
�
40
1 �
50
2
65
�
80
3
100
4
125
�
150
6
200
8
250
10
300
12
350
14
375
15
400
16
Order code for "Design", options F DN 450 (18")
Nominal diameter
[mm]
[in]
450
18
500
20
600
24
700
28
�
30
800
32
900
36
1000
40
�
42
1200
48
�
54
1400
�
�
60
1600
�
�
66
1800
72
�
78
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Reference values ASME (Class 150)
[lb] 11 � 15 20 � 31 42 � 73 115 198 284 379 � 448
Reference values ASME (Class 150), AWWA (Class D)
[lb] 421 503 666 587 701 845 1 036 1 294 1 477 1 987 2 807
� 3 515
� 4 699 5 662 6 864
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Technical data
Order code for "Design", options F DN 450 (18")
Nominal diameter
[mm]
[in]
2000
�
�
84
2200
�
�
90
2400
�
Reference values ASME (Class 150), AWWA (Class D)
[lb] 6 864 8 280
� 10 577
�
Order code for "Design", options G DN 450 (18")
Nominal diameter
[mm]
[in]
450
18
500
20
600
24
700
28
�
30
800
32
900
36
1000
40
�
42
1200
48
�
54
1400
�
�
60
1600
�
�
66
1800
72
�
78
2000
�
Reference values ASME (Class 150), AWWA (Class D)
[lb] 562 628 893 882 1 014 1 213 1 764 1 984 2 426 3 087 4 851
� 5 954
� 8 158 9 040 10 143
�
Measuring tube specification
Nominal diameter
Pressure rating
EN (DIN)
ASME
AS 2129
JIS
AWWA
AS 4087
[mm]
[in]
25
1
PN 40
Class 150
�
20K
32
�
PN 40
�
�
20K
40
1 �
PN 40
Class 150
�
20K
50
2
PN 40
Class 150 Table E, PN 16 10K
Measuring tube internal diameter
Hard rubber
Polyurethane
PTFE
[mm]
[in]
[mm]
[in]
[mm]
[in]
�
�
24
0.94
25
0.98
�
�
32
1.26
34
1.34
�
�
38
1.50
40
1.57
50
1.97
50
1.97
52
2.05
Endress+Hauser
199
Technical data
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Nominal diameter
Pressure rating
EN (DIN)
ASME
AS 2129
JIS
AWWA
AS 4087
[mm]
[in]
50 1)
2
PN 40
Class 150 Table E, PN 16 10K
65
�
PN 16
�
�
10K
65 1)
�
PN 16
�
�
10K
80
3
PN 16
Class 150 Table E, PN 16 10K
80 1)
3
PN 16
Class 150 Table E, PN 16 10K
100
4
PN 16
Class 150 Table E, PN 16 10K
100 1)
4
PN 16
Class 150 Table E, PN 16 10K
125
�
PN 16
�
�
10K
125 1)
�
PN 16
�
�
10K
150
6
PN 16
Class 150 Table E, PN 16 10K
150 1)
6
PN 16
Class 150 Table E, PN 16 10K
200
8
PN 10
Class 150 Table E, PN 16 10K
200 1)
8
PN 16
Class 150 Table E, PN 16 10K
250
10
PN 10
Class 150 Table E, PN 16 10K
250 1)
10
PN 16
Class 150 Table E, PN 16 10K
300
12
PN 10
Class 150 Table E, PN 16 10K
300 1)
12
PN 16
Class 150 Table E, PN 16 10K
350
14
PN 6
Class 150 Table E, PN 16 10K
375
15
�
�
PN 16
10K
400
16
PN 6
Class 150 Table E, PN 16 10K
450
18
PN 6
Class 150
�
10K
500
20
PN 6
Class 150 Table E, PN 16 10K
600
24
PN 6
Class 150 Table E, PN 16 10K
700
28
PN 6
Class D
Table E, PN 16 10K
750
30
�
Class D
Table E, PN 16 10K
800
32
PN 6
Class D
Table E, PN 16
�
900
36
PN 6
Class D
Table E, PN 16
�
1000
40
PN 6
Class D
Table E, PN 16
�
�
42
�
Class D
�
�
1200
48
PN 6
Class D
Table E, PN 16
�
�
54
�
Class D
�
�
1400
�
PN 6
�
�
�
�
60
�
Class D
�
�
1600
�
PN 6
�
�
�
�
66
�
Class D
�
�
1800
72
PN 6
�
�
�
�
78
�
Class D
�
�
2000
�
PN 6
�
�
�
�
84
�
Class D
�
�
2200
�
PN 6
�
�
�
Measuring tube internal diameter
Hard rubber
Polyurethane
PTFE
[mm]
[in]
[mm]
[in]
32
1.26
�
�
66
2.60
66
2.60
38
1.50
�
�
79
3.11
79
3.11
50
1.97
�
�
102
4.02
102
4.02
66
2.60
�
�
127
5.00
127
5.00
79
3.11
�
�
156
6.14
156
6.14
102
4.02
�
�
204
8.03
204
8.03
127
5.00
�
�
258
10.2
258
10.2
156
6.14
�
�
309
12.2
309
12.2
204
8.03
�
�
337
13.3
342
13.5
389
15.3
�
�
387
15.2
392
15.4
436
17.1
437
17.2
487
19.1
492
19.4
589
23.0
594
23.4
688
27.1
692
27.2
737
29.1
742
29.2
788
31.0
794
31.3
889
35.0
891
35.1
991
39.0
994
39.1
1 043
41.1
1 043
41.1
1 191
46.9
1 197
47.1
1 339
52.7
�
�
1 402
55.2
�
�
1 492
58.7
�
�
1 600
63.0
�
�
1 638
64.5
�
�
1 786
70.3
�
�
1 989
78.3
�
�
1 989
78.3
�
�
2 099
84.0
�
�
2 194
87.8
�
�
[mm] � 68 � 80 �
104 �
130 �
156 �
202 �
256 �
306 � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � �
[in] �
2.68 �
3.15 �
4.09 �
5.12 �
6.14 �
7.95 �
10.08 �
12.05 � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � �
200
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Technical data
Nominal diameter EN (DIN)
[mm]
[in]
�
90
2400
�
� PN 6
Pressure rating
ASME
AS 2129
AWWA
AS 4087
Class D
�
�
�
1) Order code for "Design", option C
Measuring tube internal diameter
JIS
Hard rubber
Polyurethane
PTFE
[mm]
[in]
[mm]
[in]
[mm]
[in]
�
2 246
89.8
�
�
�
�
�
2 391
94.1
�
�
�
�
Materials
Transmitter housing Order code for "Housing": Option A "Aluminum, coated": aluminum, AlSi10Mg, coated
Window material Order code for "Housing": Option A "Aluminum, coated": glass
Cable entries/cable glands
Order code for "Housing", option A "Aluminum, coated" The various cable entries are suitable for hazardous and non-hazardous areas.
Cable entry/cable gland Coupling M20 � 1.5 Adapter for cable entry with internal thread G �" Adapter for cable entry with internal thread NPT �"
Material Non-Ex: plastic Z2, D2, Ex d/de: brass with plastic Nickel-plated brass
Sensor housing � DN 25 to 300 (1 to 12")
Aluminum half-shell housing, aluminum, AlSi10Mg, coated � DN 350 to 2400 (14 to 90")
Fully welded carbon steel housing with protective varnish
Measuring tubes � DN 25 to 600 (1 to 24")
Stainless steel: 1.4301, 1.4306, 304, 304L � DN 700 to 2400 (28 to 90")
Stainless steel: 1.4301, 304 Liner � DN 25 to 300 (1 to 12"): PTFE � DN 25 to 1200 (1 to 48"): polyurethane � DN 50 to 2400 (2 to 90"): hard rubber
Electrodes � Stainless steel, 1.4435 (316L) � Alloy C22, 2.4602 (UNS N06022) � Tantalum
Endress+Hauser
201
Technical data 202
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Process connections For flanges made of carbon steel: � DN 300 (12"): with Al/Zn protective coating or protective varnish � DN 350 (14"): protective varnish All carbon steel lap joint flanges are supplied with a hot-dip galvanized finish.
EN 1092-1 (DIN 2501) Fixed flange � Carbon steel:
� DN 300: S235JRG2, S235JR+N, P245GH, A105, E250C � DN 350 to 2400: P245GH, S235JRG2, A105, E250C � Stainless steel: � DN 300: 1.4404, 1.4571, F316L � DN 350 to 600: 1.4571, F316L, 1.4404 � DN 700 to 1000: 1.4404, F316L Lap joint flange � Carbon steel DN 300: S235JRG2, A105, E250C � Stainless steel DN 300: 1.4306,1.4404, 1.4571, F316L Lap joint flange, stamped plate � Carbon steel DN 300: S235JRG2 similar to S235JR+AR or 1.0038 � Stainless steel DN 300: 1.4301 similar to 304 ASME B16.5 Fixed flange, lap joint flange � Carbon steel: A105 � Stainless steel: F316L JIS B2220 � Carbon steel: A105, A350 LF2 � Stainless steel: F316L AWWA C207 Carbon steel: A105, P265GH, A181 Class 70, E250C, S275JR AS 2129 Carbon steel: A105, E250C, P235GH, P265GH, S235JRG2 AS 4087 Carbon steel: A105, P265GH, S275JR
Seals As per DIN EN 1514-1, form IBC
Accessories Protective cover Stainless steel, 1.4404 (316L) External WLAN antenna � Antenna: ASA plastic (acrylic ester-styrene-acrylonitrile) and nickel-plated brass � Adapter: Stainless steel and nickel-plated brass � Cable: Polyethylene � Plug: Nickel-plated brass � Angle bracket: Stainless steel
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Technical data
Fitted electrodes Process connections
Ground disks � Stainless steel, 1.4435 (316L) � Alloy C22, 2.4602 (UNS N06022) � Tantalum
Measurement, reference and empty pipe detection electrodes available as standard with: � 1.4435 (316L) � Alloy C22, 2.4602 (UNS N06022) � Tantalum
� EN 1092-1 (DIN 2501) � DN 300: fixed flange (PN 10/16/25/40) = Form A, lap joint flange (PN 10/16), lap joint flange, stamped plate (PN 10) = Form A � DN 350: fixed flange (PN 6/10/16/25) = flat face (Form B) � DN 450 to 2400: fixed flange (PN 6/10/16) = flat face (Form B)
� ASME B16.5 � DN 350 to 2400 (14 to 90"): fixed flange (Class 150) � DN 25 to 600 (1 to 24"): lap joint flange (Class 150) � DN 25 to 150 (1 to 6"): fixed flange (Class 300)
� JIS B2220 � DN 50 to 750: fixed flange (10K) � DN 25 to 600: fixed flange (20K)
� AWWA C207 DN 48 to 90": fixed flange (Class D)
� AS 2129 DN 50 to 1200: fixed flange (Table E)
� AS 4087 DN 50 to 1200): fixed flange (PN 16) For information on the different materials used in the process connections 202
Surface roughness Languages
Electrodes with 1.4435 (316L); Alloy C22, 2.4602 (UNS N06022); tantalum: 0.3 to 0.5 �m (11.8 to 19.7 �in) (All data relate to parts in contact with fluid)
16.11 Human interface
Can be operated in the following languages: � Via local operation
English, German, French, Spanish, Italian, Dutch, Portuguese, Polish, Russian, Turkish, Chinese, Japanese, Korean, Bahasa (Indonesian), Vietnamese, Czech, Swedish � Via Web browser English, German, French, Spanish, Italian, Dutch, Portuguese, Polish, Russian, Turkish, Chinese, Japanese, Korean, Bahasa (Indonesian), Vietnamese, Czech, Swedish � Via "FieldCare", "DeviceCare" operating tool: English, German, French, Spanish, Italian, Chinese, Japanese
Endress+Hauser
203
Technical data Local operation
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Via display module Equipment: � Order code for "Display; operation", option F "4-line, illuminated, graphic display;
touch control" � Order code for "Display; operation", option G "4-line, illuminated, graphic display;
touch control + WLAN" Information about WLAN interface 78
36 Operation with touch control
A0026785
Display elements � 4-line, illuminated, graphic display � White background lighting; switches to red in event of device errors � Format for displaying measured variables and status variables can be individually
configured � Permitted ambient temperature for the display: �20 to +60 �C (�4 to +140 �F)
The readability of the display may be impaired at temperatures outside the temperature range.
Operating elements � External operation via touch control (3 optical keys) without opening the housing: ,
, � Operating elements also accessible in the various zones of the hazardous area
Via remote display and operating module DKX001 The remote display and operating module DKX001 is available as an optional extra 175. � The measuring device is always supplied with a dummy cover when the remote display and operating module DKX001 is ordered directly with the measuring device. Display or operation at the transmitter is not possible in this case. � If ordered subsequently, the remote display and operating module DKX001 may not be connected at the same time as the existing measuring device display module. Only one display or operation unit may be connected to the transmitter at any one time.
204
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Technical data
37 Operation via remote display and operating module DKX001
A0026786
Display and operating elements The display and operating elements correspond to those of the display module 204.
Housing material
Transmitter housing Order code for "Housing" Option A "Aluminum, coated"
Material AlSi10Mg, coated
Remote display and operating module Material AlSi10Mg, coated
Cable entry Corresponds to the choice of transmitter housing, order code for "Electrical connection".
Connecting cable 37
Dimensions Information on the dimensions: "Mechanical construction" section of the "Technical Information" document.
Remote operation
76
Service interface
77
Supported operating tools
Different operating tools can be used for local or remote access to the measuring device. Depending on the operating tool used, access is possible with different operating units and via a variety of interfaces.
Endress+Hauser
205
Technical data 206
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Supported operating tools Web browser
DeviceCare SFE100
FieldCare SFE500
Operating unit
Interface
Additional information
Notebook, PC or tablet with Web browser
� CDI-RJ45 service interface
� WLAN interface � Ethernet-based
fieldbus (EtherNet/IP, PROFINET)
Special Documentation for device
Notebook, PC or tablet � CDI-RJ45 service
with Microsoft Windows interface
system
� WLAN interface
� Fieldbus protocol
176
Notebook, PC or tablet � CDI-RJ45 service
with Microsoft Windows interface
system
� WLAN interface
� Fieldbus protocol
176
Other operating tools based on FDT technology with a device driver such as DTM/ iDTM or DD/EDD can be used for device operation. These operating tools are available from the individual manufacturers. Integration into the following operating tools, among others, is supported: � Field Device Manager (FDM) by Honeywell www.honeywellprocess.com � FieldMate by Yokogawa www.yokogawa.com � PACTWare www.pactware.com The associated device description files are available at: www.endress.com Downloads
Web server Thanks to the integrated Web server, the device can be operated and configured via a Web browser and via a service interface (CDI-RJ45) or via a WLAN interface. The structure of the operating menu is the same as for the local display. In addition to the measured values, status information on the device is also displayed and allows the user to monitor the status of the device. Furthermore the device data can be managed and the network parameters can be configured. A device that has a WLAN interface (can be ordered as an option) is required for the WLAN connection: order code for "Display; operation", option G "4-line, illuminated; touch control + WLAN". The device acts as an Access Point and enables communication by computer or a mobile handheld terminal. Supported functions Data exchange between the operating unit (such as a notebook for example) and the measuring device: � Upload the configuration from the measuring device (XML format, configuration
backup) � Save the configuration to the measuring device (XML format, restore configuration) � Export event list (.csv file) � Export parameter settings (.csv file or PDF file, document the measuring point
configuration) � Export the Heartbeat verification log (PDF file, only available with the "Heartbeat
Verification" application package) � Flash firmware version for device firmware upgrade, for instance � Download driver for system integration � Visualize up to 1000 saved measured values (only available with the Extended
HistoROM application package 209) Web server special documentation 211
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Technical data
HistoROM data management
The measuring device features HistoROM data management. HistoROM data management comprises both the storage and import/export of key device and process data, making operation and servicing far more reliable, secure and efficient.
When the device is delivered, the factory settings of the configuration data are stored as a backup in the device memory. This memory can be overwritten with an updated data record, for example after commissioning.
Additional information on the data storage concept
There are different types of data storage units in which device data are stored and used by the device:
Device memory
T-DAT
S-DAT
Available data
� Event logbook such as diagnostic events for example
� Parameter data record backup � Device firmware package � Driver for system integration for exporting
via Web server, e.g: EDS for EtherNet/IP
� Measured value logging ("Extended HistoROM" order option)
� Current parameter data record (used by firmware at run time)
� Peakhold indicator (min/max values) � Totalizer values
� Sensor data: nominal diameter etc. � Serial number � Calibration data � Device configuration (e.g. SW options,
fixed I/O or multi I/O)
Storage location Fixed on the user interface board in the connection compartment
Attachable to the user interface board in In the sensor plug in the transmitter
the connection compartment
neck part
Data backup Automatic � The most important device data (sensor and transmitter) are automatically saved in the
DAT modules � If the transmitter or measuring device is replaced: once the T-DAT containing the
previous device data has been exchanged, the new measuring device is ready for operation again immediately without any errors � If the sensor is replaced: once the sensor has been replaced, new sensor data are transferred from the S-DAT in the measuring device and the measuring device is ready for operation again immediately without any errors � If exchanging the electronics module (e.g. I/O electronics module): Once the electronics module has been replaced, the software of the module is compared against the current device firmware. The module software is upgraded or downgraded where necessary. The electronics module is available for use immediately afterwards and no compatibility problems occur. Manual Additional parameter data record (complete parameter settings) in the integrated device memory HistoROM backup for: � Data backup function Backup and subsequent restoration of a device configuration in the device memory HistoROM backup � Data comparison function Comparison of the current device configuration with the device configuration saved in the device memory HistoROM backup
Data transfer Manual � Transfer of a device configuration to another device using the export function of the
specific operating tool, e.g. with FieldCare, DeviceCare or Web server: to duplicate the configuration or to store in an archive (e.g. for backup purposes) � Transmission of the drivers for system integration via Web server, e.g.: EDS for EtherNet/IP
Endress+Hauser
207
Technical data
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Event list Automatic � Chronological display of up to 20 event messages in the events list � If the Extended HistoROM application package (order option) is enabled: up to 100
event messages are displayed in the events list along with a time stamp, plain text description and remedial measures � The events list can be exported and displayed via a variety of interfaces and operating tools e.g. DeviceCare, FieldCare or Web server
Data logging Manual If the Extended HistoROM application package (order option) is enabled: � Record up to 1 000 measured values via 1 to 4 channels � User configurable recording interval � Record up to 250 measured values via each of the 4 memory channels � Export the measured value log via a variety of interfaces and operating tools e.g.
FieldCare, DeviceCare or web server
CE mark RCM-tick symbol
16.12 Certificates and approvals
Currently available certificates and approvals can be called up via the product configurator.
The device meets the legal requirements of the applicable EU Directives. These are listed in the corresponding EU Declaration of Conformity along with the standards applied. Endress+Hauser confirms successful testing of the device by affixing to it the CE mark.
The measuring system meets the EMC requirements of the "Australian Communications and Media Authority (ACMA)".
Ex approval
The devices are certified for use in hazardous areas and the relevant safety instructions are provided in the separate "Safety Instructions" (XA) document. Reference is made to this document on the nameplate.
Drinking water approval
� ACS � KTW/W270 � NSF 61 � WRAS BS 6920
EtherNet/IP certification Radio approval
The measuring device is certified and registered by the ODVA (Open Device Vendor Association). The measuring system meets all the requirements of the following specifications: � Certified in accordance with the ODVA Conformance Test � EtherNet/IP Performance Test � EtherNet/IP PlugFest compliance � The device can also be operated with certified devices of other manufacturers
(interoperability)
The measuring device has radio approval. For detailed information regarding radio approval, see Special Documentation
208
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Technical data
Other standards and guidelines Diagnostics functions
� EN 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP code)
� EN 61010-1 Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement, control and laboratory use - general requirements
� IEC/EN 61326 Emission in accordance with Class A requirements. Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC requirements).
� NAMUR NE 21 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) of industrial process and laboratory control equipment
� NAMUR NE 32 Data retention in the event of a power failure in field and control instruments with microprocessors
� NAMUR NE 43 Standardization of the signal level for the breakdown information of digital transmitters with analog output signal.
� NAMUR NE 53 Software of field devices and signal-processing devices with digital electronics
� NAMUR NE 105 Specifications for integrating fieldbus devices in engineering tools for field devices
� NAMUR NE 107 Self-monitoring and diagnosis of field devices
� NAMUR NE 131 Requirements for field devices for standard applications
� ETSI EN 300 328 Guidelines for 2.4 GHz radio components.
� EN 301489 Electromagnetic compatibility and radio spectrum matters (ERM).
16.13 Application packages
Many different application packages are available to enhance the functionality of the device. Such packages might be needed to address safety aspects or specific application requirements. The application packages can be ordered with the device or subsequently from Endress+Hauser. Detailed information on the order code in question is available from your local Endress+Hauser sales center or on the product page of the Endress+Hauser website: www.endress.com.
Package Extended HistoROM
Description
Comprises extended functions concerning the event log and the activation of the measured value memory.
Event log: Memory volume is extended from 20 message entries (standard version) to up to 100 entries.
Data logging (line recorder): � Memory capacity for up to 1000 measured values is activated. � 250 measured values can be output via each of the 4 memory channels. The
recording interval can be defined and configured by the user. � Measured value logs can be accessed via the local display or operating tool e.g.
FieldCare, DeviceCare or Web server.
Endress+Hauser
209
Technical data
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Heartbeat Technology Cleaning
Package
Heartbeat Verification +Monitoring
Description
Heartbeat Verification Meets the requirement for traceable verification to DIN ISO 9001:2008 Chapter 7.6 a) "Control of monitoring and measuring equipment". � Functional testing in the installed state without interrupting the process. � Traceable verification results on request, including a report. � Simple testing process via local operation or other operating interfaces. � Clear measuring point assessment (pass/fail) with high test coverage within the
framework of manufacturer specifications. � Extension of calibration intervals according to operator's risk assessment.
Heartbeat Monitoring Continuously supplies data, which are characteristic of the measuring principle, to an external condition monitoring system for the purpose of preventive maintenance or process analysis. These data enable the operator to: � Draw conclusions - using these data and other information - about the impact
process influences (such as corrosion, abrasion, buildup etc.) have on the measuring performance over time. � Schedule servicing in time. � Monitor the process or product quality, e.g. gas pockets.
Package
Electrode cleaning circuit (ECC)
Description
The electrode cleaning circuit (ECC) function has been developed to have a solution for applications where magnetite (Fe3O4) deposits frequently occur (e.g. hot water). Since magnetite is highly conductive this build up leads to measuring errors and ultimately to the loss of signal. The application package is designed to AVOID build up of highly conductive matter and thin layers (typical of magnetite).
16.14 Accessories
Overview of accessories available for order 175
16.15 Supplementary documentation
For an overview of the scope of the associated Technical Documentation, refer to the following: � W@M Device Viewer (www.endress.com/deviceviewer): Enter the serial number
from nameplate � Endress+Hauser Operations App: Enter the serial number from the nameplate or
scan the 2D matrix code (QR code) on the nameplate
Standard documentation
Brief Operating Instructions
Brief Operating Instructions for the sensor
Measuring device Proline Promag W
Documentation code KA01266D
Brief Operating Instructions for transmitter
Measuring device Proline 300
Documentation code KA01338D
210
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Measuring device Promag W 300
Technical Information
Documentation code TI01414D
Measuring device Promag 300
Description of device parameters
Documentation code GP01113D
Device-dependent additional documentation
Contents ATEX/IECEx Ex d/Ex de ATEX/IECEx Ex ec cCSAus XP cCSAus Ex d/ Ex de cCSAus Ex nA INMETRO Ex d/Ex de INMETRO Ex ec NEPSI Ex d/Ex de NEPSI Ex nA EAC Ex d/Ex de EAC Ex nA JPN Ex d
Safety instructions Safety instructions for electrical equipment for hazardous areas.
Documentation code XA01414D XA01514D XA01515D XA01516D XA01517D XA01518D XA01519D XA01520D XA01521D XA01656D XA01657D XA01775D
Remote display and operating module DKX001
Contents ATEX/IECEx Ex i ATEX/IECEx Ex ec cCSAus IS cCSAus Ex nA INMETRO Ex i INMETRO Ex ec NEPSI Ex i NEPSI Ex nA
Documentation code XA01494D XA01498D XA01499D XA01513D XA01500D XA01501D XA01502D XA01503D
Special Documentation
Contents Information on the Pressure Equipment Directive Radio approvals for WLAN interface for A309/A310 display module Remote display and operating module DKX001
Documentation code SD01614D SD01793D SD01763D
Endress+Hauser
Technical data 211
Technical data
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Contents Heartbeat Technology Web server
Documentation code SD01980D SD01976D
Installation Instructions
Content Installation instructions for spare part sets and accessories
Comment
� Access the overview of all the available spare part sets via W@M Device Viewer 173
� Accessories available for order with Installation Instructions 175
212
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Index
Index
A
About this document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Access authorization to parameters
Read access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Write access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Access code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Incorrect input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Adapting the diagnostic behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Ambient temperature Influence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Ambient temperature range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Applicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
C
Cable entries Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Cable entry Degree of protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
CE mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10, 208 Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Checklist
Post-connection check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Post-installation check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Cleaning Exterior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Interior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Advanced settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Configuring the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Conductivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Connecting cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36, 37 Connecting the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Connecting the signal cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Connecting the supply voltage cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Connection see Electrical connection Connection examples, potential equalization . . . . 46, 47 Connection preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Connection tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Context menu Calling up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Current consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Cyclic data transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
D
Declaration of Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Define access code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130, 131 Degree of protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53, 192 Designated use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Device components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Device description files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Device documentation Supplementary documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Device locking, status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Device name
Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Device repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Device revision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Device type ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 DeviceCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Device description file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Diagnostic behavior Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Diagnostic information Communication interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Design, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148, 151 DeviceCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 FieldCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Light emitting diodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Local display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Remedial measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Web browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Diagnostic list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Diagnostic message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Diagnostics Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 DIP switches see Write protection switch Direct access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Direct access code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Disabling write protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Display see Onsite display Display and operating module DKX001 . . . . . . . . . . 204 Display area For operational display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 In the navigation view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Display values For locking status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Document Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Document function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Down pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Drinking water approval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
E
ECC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Editing view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Input screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Using operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Electrical connection Degree of protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Endress+Hauser
213
Index
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Operating tools
Via Ethernet network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Via service interface (CDI-RJ45) . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Via WLAN interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 RSLogix 5000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Web server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 WLAN interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Electromagnetic compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Electronics module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Enabling write protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Enabling/disabling the keypad lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Endress+Hauser services Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Environment Ambient temperature range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Mechanical load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Storage temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Vibration- and shock-resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Error messages see Diagnostic messages EtherNet/IP Diagnostic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 EtherNet/IP certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Event list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Event logbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Ex approval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Extended order code Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Exterior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
F
Field of application Residual risks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
FieldCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Device description file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Establishing a connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 User interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Filtering the event logbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Firmware
Release date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Firmware history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Fitted electrodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Fix assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Flow direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Flow limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Function check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Functions see Parameter
G
Galvanic isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
H
Hardware write protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Heavy sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Help text
Calling up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 HistoROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
I
Identifying the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Incoming acceptance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Influence
Ambient temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Inlet runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Inspection
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Received goods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Inspection check Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Installation conditions Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Down pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Heavy sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Inlet and outlet runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Installation dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Mounting location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Partially filled pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 System pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Thermal insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Vibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Installation dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Interior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
L
Languages, operation options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Line recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Local display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Navigation view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 see Diagnostic message see In alarm condition see Operational display Low flow cut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
M
Main electronics module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Maintenance tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Replacing seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Managing the device configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Manufacturer ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Manufacturing date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 17 Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Maximum measured error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Measured values
Calculated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Measured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 see Process variables Measuring and test equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
214
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Index
Measuring device Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Integrating via communication protocol . . . . . . . . 82 Mounting the sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Mounting the ground cable/ground disks . . . . . 27 Mounting the seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Screw tightening torques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Screw tightening torques, maximum . . . . . . . . 27 Screw tightening torques, nominal . . . . . . . . . . 32 Preparing for electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Preparing for mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Switch-on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Measuring principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Measuring range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Measuring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Measuring tube specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Mechanical load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Medium temperature range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Menu
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94, 95 Menus For measuring device configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 For specific settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Mounting dimensions see Installation dimensions Mounting location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Mounting preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Mounting tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
N
Nameplate Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Navigation path (navigation view) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Navigation view
In the submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 In the wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Numeric editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
O
Onsite display Numeric editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Text editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Operable flow range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63, 148 Operating keys
see Operating elements Operating menu
Menus, submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Submenus and user roles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Operating philosophy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Operation options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Operational display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Operational safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Order code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 17 Orientation (vertical, horizontal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Outlet runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Output signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
P
Packaging disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Parameter
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Entering values or text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Parameter settings
Administration (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Advanced setup (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Communication (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Configuration backup (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Current input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Current input (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Current input 1 to n (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Current output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Current output (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Data logging (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Define access code (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Device information (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Diagnostics (Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Display (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Display (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Electrode cleaning circuit (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . 121
Empty pipe detection (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
I/O configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
I/O configuration (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Low flow cut off (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Process variables (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Pulse/frequency/switch output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Pulse/frequency/switch output (Wizard) 103,
104,
107
Pulse/frequency/switch output 1 to n (Submenu) 137
Relay output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Relay output 1 to n (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Relay output 1 to n (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Reset access code (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Sensor adjustment (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Setup (Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Simulation (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Status input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Status input (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Status input 1 to n (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
System units (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Totalizer (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Totalizer 1 to n (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Totalizer handling (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Value current output 1 to n (Submenu) . . . . . . . . 136
Web server (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
WLAN settings (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Partially filled pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Performance characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Endress+Hauser
215
Index
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Post-connection check (checklist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Post-installation check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Post-installation check (checklist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Potential equalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Power supply failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Pressure loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Pressure tightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Pressure-temperature ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Process conditions
Conductivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Flow limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Medium temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Pressure loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Pressure tightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Process connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Product safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Protecting parameter settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
R
Radio approval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 RCM-tick symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Read access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Reading measured values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Reading out diagnostic information, EtherNet/IP . . . 152 Recalibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Reference operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Registered trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Remedial measures
Calling up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Remote operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Repair of a device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Repairs Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Repeatability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Replacement Device components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Replacing seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Requirements for personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
S
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Screw tightening torques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Maximum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Nominal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Sensor Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 17 Setting the operating language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Settings Adapting the measuring device to the process conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Advanced display configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Communication interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Current input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Current output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Device reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Electrode cleaning circuit (ECC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Empty pipe detection (EPD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 I/O configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Local display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Low flow cut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Managing the device configuration . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Operating language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Pulse output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Pulse/frequency/switch output . . . . . . . . . . 103, 104 Relay output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Resetting the totalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Sensor adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Status input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Switch output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 System units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Tag name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Totalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Totalizer reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 WLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Showing data logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Signal on alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Software release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Spare part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Special connection instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Standards and guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Status area For operational display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 In the navigation view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Status signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147, 150 Storage concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Storage conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Storage temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Storage temperature range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Structure Measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Operating menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Submenu Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125, 127 Advanced setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115, 116 Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Configuration backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Current input 1 to n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Data logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Device information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Electrode cleaning circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Event list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 I/O configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Input values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Measured values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Output values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Process variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Pulse/frequency/switch output 1 to n . . . . . . . . . 137 Relay output 1 to n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
216
Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag W 300 EtherNet/IP
Index
Reset access code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Sensor adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Status input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Status input 1 to n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 System units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Totalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Totalizer 1 to n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Totalizer handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Value current output 1 to n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Web server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Supplementary documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Supply voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Surface roughness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Switch output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Symbols Controlling data entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 For communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 For diagnostic behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 For locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 For measured variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 For measurement channel number . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 For menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 For parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 For status signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 For submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 For wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 In the status area of the local display . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Input screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 System design Measuring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 see Measuring device design System file Release date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 System integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 System pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
T
Technical data, overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Temperature range
Ambient temperature range for display . . . . . . . . 204 Storage temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Terminal assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Text editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Thermal insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Tool tip see Help text Tools Electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 For mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Totalizer Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Transmitter Turning the display module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Turning the housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Transporting the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Troubleshooting
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Turning the display module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Turning the electronics housing
see Turning the transmitter housing Turning the transmitter housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
U
Use of the measuring device Borderline cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Incorrect use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 see Designated use
User interface Current diagnostic event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Previous diagnostic event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
User roles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
V
Version data for the device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Vibration- and shock-resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Vibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
W
W@M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172, 173 W@M Device Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 173 Weight
Transport (notes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Wizard
Current input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Current output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Define access code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Empty pipe detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Low flow cut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Pulse/frequency/switch output . . . . . . 103, 104, 107 Relay output 1 to n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 WLAN settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 WLAN settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Workplace safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Write access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Write protection Via access code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Via write protection switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Write protection switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Endress+Hauser
217
www.addresses.endress.com